LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Television

Connect 40 3D - Television LOEWE - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free Connect 40 3D LOEWE in PDF.

📄 156 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 12 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice LOEWE Connect 40 3D - page 7
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Brand Loewe
Model Connect 40 3D
Product Type LED-backlit LCD television with 3D capability
Screen Size 40 inches (102 cm diagonal)
Resolution Full HD 1920 x 1080 pixels
3D Technology Active shutter 3D (requires active glasses)
Tuner DVB-T/C/S2 (terrestrial, cable, satellite)
Smart TV Platform Loewe DR+ (proprietary, with streaming apps)
Dimensions (with stand) Approx. 94 x 65 x 24 cm (W x H x D)
Weight (with stand) Approx. 18 kg
Power Consumption (typical) 120 W
Standby Power Consumption < 0.5 W
Audio Output 2 x 10 W (stereo)
Connectivity 3x HDMI, 1x USB, 1x SCART, 1x CI+, Ethernet, Wi-Fi (optional dongle)
Wall Mount VESA VESA 200 x 200 mm
Energy Class A+ (EU label)
Maintenance Clean the screen with a soft, dry microfiber cloth. Avoid aggressive cleaners.
Safety Do not expose to rain or moisture. Ensure adequate ventilation. Keep away from heat sources.
Spare Parts & Reparability Contact Loewe service centers for spare parts. Repairs should be done by qualified technicians.
General Information Premium German design; integrates into Loewe sound systems. Operating system: DR+ with media library.

Frequently Asked Questions - Connect 40 3D LOEWE

How do I connect external devices like a Blu-ray player or game console?
Use one of the HDMI ports on the back or side of the TV. Simply plug the HDMI cable into the device and into the TV, then select the correct HDMI input using the Source button on the remote.
What type of 3D glasses are compatible with this TV?
The Loewe Connect 40 3D uses active shutter technology. Compatible glasses are Loewe 3D active glasses or universal models that support active 3D at 1080p. Ensure the glasses are charged and synchronized via IR or Bluetooth.
How can I update the TV's firmware?
Firmware updates can be downloaded from the Loewe support website. Save the file to a USB flash drive, insert it into the TV, and navigate to Settings > Software Update > USB Update. Follow on-screen instructions.
My remote control is not working. What should I do?
First, check the batteries. Replace them if needed. If still not working, try resetting the remote by removing the batteries and pressing all buttons for 10 seconds. Then reinsert batteries. Also, ensure there are no obstructions between the remote and the TV sensor.
How do I adjust picture settings for optimal quality?
Go to Menu > Picture. You can select presets like Cinema, Sport, or Vivid. For manual adjustment, modify Brightness, Contrast, Color, Sharpness, and Backlight. Use a calibration disc for best results.
How can I enable energy-saving mode?
Press the Eco button on the remote or navigate to Settings > Energy Saving. Activate Eco Mode to reduce backlight brightness. You can also set a Sleep Timer to turn off the TV automatically.
Can I mount this TV on the wall? What VESA size?
Yes, it is wall-mountable. The VESA pattern is 200 x 200 mm. Use a compatible wall mount bracket rated for at least 20 kg. Ensure the wall can support the weight.
The TV has no picture but sound works. What is wrong?
This could be a backlight issue. Try shining a flashlight on the screen; if you see a faint image, the backlight needs repair. Also, check the input source and cable connections. If the problem persists, contact Loewe service.
How do I perform a factory reset?
Go to Settings > System > Factory Reset. Enter the PIN (default is 0000) and confirm. This will erase all personal settings and return the TV to its original state.
What audio outputs are available?
The TV has HDMI ARC (on HDMI 1) for soundbar or receiver connection, a digital optical audio output, and analog headphone jack. You can also use the SCART for composite audio.

User questions about Connect 40 3D LOEWE

2 questions about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No sound from the soundbar connected to the LOEWE Connect 40 3D TV, how to resolve this issue?
Frequently Asked Questions - 19/06/2026
Response Notice-Facile

Here are the points to check if no sound is coming from your soundbar connected to the LOEWE Connect 40 3D TV:

Essential Checks

  • TV Volume: Make sure the TV volume is not at minimum or muted. Use the remote control to increase the sound level.
  • Soundbar Volume: Also check that the volume of the soundbar itself is not too low or turned off (check the control buttons on the bar).
  • Correct Audio Source: Access the TV's Audio/Sound settings menu and ensure that the audio output is set to use the HDMI port or optical audio port (depending on your type of connection) and not the internal speakers.

Audio Output Configuration

On the LOEWE Connect 40 3D, go to the Settings > Sound menu and check that:

  • The audio output option (HDMI ARC, optical, or other depending on the connection) is selected as the main output device.
  • The TV speakers are not configured as the default output.
  • No power-saving mode has disabled HDMI audio.

If the problem persists after these checks, test the soundbar with another source (DVD player, TV decoder, etc.) to confirm that it works properly outside of the TV.

Respond (be the first)
How to connect a JBL SB510 3.1 soundbar to this LOEWE TV?
Frequently Asked Questions - 11/06/2026
Response Notice-Facile

Yes, you can connect a JBL SB510 3.1 soundbar to the LOEWE Connect 40 3D TV. Here are the best methods:

Connection via HDMI eARC (recommended)

The LOEWE Connect 40 3D TV has HDMI ports with eARC/ARC support. This is the ideal method for the JBL SB510:

  • Connect the HDMI cable from the soundbar to one of the HDMI ports on the TV (check which one supports eARC in your manual).
  • Enable eARC or ARC in the TV's audio settings.
  • The soundbar will automatically receive the audio stream from the TV and connected sources.

Connection via optical output (TOSLINK)

If your soundbar supports it, you can also use the digital optical output of the TV:

  • Connect a TOSLINK optical cable from the TV's S/PDIF output to the optical input of the JBL SB510.
  • This connection offers good audio quality and works well for most content.

Bluetooth connection

The JBL SB510 also supports Bluetooth. If you prefer a wireless connection:

  • Put the soundbar in pairing mode.
  • Access the Bluetooth settings of the LOEWE Connect 40 3D TV and search for the soundbar.
  • Pair the devices. You will then be able to stream audio content from the TV to the soundbar.

For the best audio performance, prefer the eARC/HDMI or optical connection over Bluetooth.

Respond (be the first)

Download the instructions for your Television in PDF format for free! Find your manual Connect 40 3D - LOEWE and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. Connect 40 3D by LOEWE.

USER MANUAL Connect 40 3D LOEWE

Operating instructions

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - 1

natural_image Modern flat-screen TV with sleek silver and black screen, mounted on a stand (no visible text or symbols)

LOEWE.

Overview of the most important functions

Set operating mode

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Set operating mode - 1

TV operation

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Set operating mode - 2

Radio operation (standard assignment)

The assignment of the AUDIO button can be changed (see page 125).

On/Off of the television set

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - On/Off of the television set - 1

On/Off device in standby

(Main switch must be turned on)

Selecting stations

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Selecting stations - 1

OK Call station overview and with

Select station with numeric buttons

Sound

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Sound - 1

V+/V- Volume up/down

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Sound - 2

Sound on/off

Colour key function during TV operation

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Colour key function during TV operation - 1

Red button:

Freeze on/off.

Start HbbTV ^(1) or interactive data service, if this is available.

Green button: Teletext functions

Yellow button: Last selected station

Blue button: Programme information

Colour key function during radio operation

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Colour key function during radio operation - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Colour key function during radio operation - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Colour key function during radio operation - 3

Red button:

On/Off screen

Yellow button: Last selecting station

Button functions

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Button functions - 1

Call MediaPortal,

select operating mode or function. (e.g. Index)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Button functions - 2

with on-screen display: Info display,

info text appropriate to the content that can assist you further, should you have any questions about your TV device;

without on-screen display: Access status display, with status display open and repeatedly pressing programme information (if available)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Button functions - 3

Open DR archive/Video archive ^2 / Timer list

Press button twice in quick succession: Show / hide time permanently

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Button functions - 4

Adjust picture format

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Button functions - 5

On/Off PIP (picture in picture)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Button functions - 6

On/Off EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Button functions - 7

On/Off teletext/MediaText ^1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Button functions - 8

Call TV menu, carry out settings

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Button functions - 9

With opened menu: Exit menu; Terminate inserts

Remote control – TV functions

LOEWE. 1 2 3 4 5 6 TV REC DVD AUDIO POP-UP-M ZOOM 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 AV EPG MEDIA PIP DISC-M MENU END INFO +V P+ OK -V P- MARKER 19 18 17

For equipment with integrated hard disc (DR) or connected external hard disc., see the Digital Recorder chapter from page 82 onwards.

^12 The assignment of these keys can be changed (see page 125). The description refers to the standard setting.

a Depending on the corresponding settings (see page 80).

① Sound off/on....(page 32)
② LED display for current operating mode....(page 125)
③ Switch over to TV mode....(page 20; 125)
④ Switch over to operate recorder ^12 .....(page 125)
⑤ DR archive/Video archive ^1 / Timer list on/off .....(page 95)
⑥ Set picture format....(page 35)
⑦ Electronic Programme Guide on/off....(page 48)
⑧ Teletext/MediaText ^3 on/off.....(page 50)
⑨ Menu on/off....(page 12)
⑩ V+/V- Volume louder/quieter ......(page 32)
⑪ Station list on....(page 30) in the menu: Confirm/call....(page 12)
⑫ Green button: Teletext functions....(page 38)
⑬ Red button: Freeze on/off / Start HbbTV or interactive data service ^3 ......(page 80)
⑭ Select station down / Jump ^1 / Rewind ^1 .....(page 87; 96)
⑮ Direct recording ^1 ......(page 89)
⑯ Still frame on/off / Interrupt timeshift television ^1 .....(page 87)
⑰ Still frame on / End timeshift ^1 ......(page 87)
⑱ Select station up / Jump ^1 / Fast forward ^1 .....(page 87; 96)
⑲ Still frame off / Continue timeshift television ^1 / Highlights ^1 ......(page 87; 88)
⑳ Blue button: Programme info on/off....(page 38)
②1 Yellow button: Previous station....(page 38)
②2 In the menu / Lists: Select/Set....(page 12)
②3 P+/P- Select Station up/down....(page 30)
24 Close all displays....(page 12)
⑲ Status display on/off / in the menu: context-relevant Info on/off......(page 40; 15)
②6 PIP on/off (picture in picture)....(page 46)
27 MediaPortal on/off....(page 14; 60)
28 AV selection....(page 31)
29 Select station directly; in the menu: Enter numbers or letters....(page 30)
③0 Set sound mode....(page 32)
③1 Switch over to operate DVD player ^2 (page 125)
③2 Switch over to radio mode ^12 ...... (page 21; 52; 125)
③3 Switch on/off – to standby mode......(page 21)

The key assignment displayed here is valid for the main menu level of the TV set. The key assignment may vary in certain operating modes (see the corresponding chapter in this operating manual).

Acknowledgements

Loewe Opta GmbH

Industriestraße 11

D-96317 Kronach

www.loewe.de

Printed in Germany

Date of issue 05/11-1.0 TB/FP

© Loewe Opta GmbH, Kronach

ID: 5.14.0

All rights including translation, technical modifications and errors reserved.

All rights including translation, t

Contents

Overview of the most important functions 2

Remote control - TV functions 3

Acknowledgements....4

Welcome....7

Scope of delivery 7

About this operating manual 7

For your safety 8

Control unit front side of the device 10

Connections rear side of the device 11

Operating convenience 12

General information on menu operation 12

Operating convenience with wizards 13

Overview of wizards 13

MediaPortal....14

The index in the TV set 15

The info display 15

TV menu – Overview diagram 16

Radio menu – Overview diagram 17

Other menus—Overview diagram 17

Initial installation 18

Installing the TV set 18

Set covers 18

Connecting the TV Set 18

Bundling the Cables 20

Preparing the remote control unit 20

Turning the set on/off....21

First installation wizard 22

Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna 29

Daily operation 30

Select station 30

Selecting Audio/Video Source 31

Adjusting the sound 32

Adjusting the picture 34

3D function 36

Daily operation (continued) 38

Button functions 38

Operation without remote control 39

Status display 40

Managing stations 42

TV stations 42

Put together / change favourites lists 45

Picture in Picture 46

Picture in Picture (PIP) 46

iPIP 46

Standard PIP 46

Configure Picture in Picture (PIP) mode 47

Electronic Programme Guide 48

Electronic Programme Guide – EPG 48

Configuring EPG 49

Teletext....50

Teletext....50

Teletext menu 51

Interactive data services 52

(Digital teletext/MHEG-5) 52

Digital radio 52

Radio mode (DVB radio) 52

EPG – Electronic Programme Guide (radio) 53

Radio mode (Internet radio) 54

Audio playback from external devices 55

Other settings 56

Parental lock 56

Timer functions 57

Language 57

On-screen displays 58

Time and date 58

Coded Stations 59

Conditional Access module (CA module) 59

Contents

Media ^+ 60

General information on Media+ 60

Connecting the TV set to your network 60

MediaNet 60

Help for configuration problems 60

MediaUpdate - additional functions 60

Accessing your media 61

Media menu 62

MediaHome 66

MediaNet 70

Video podcasts....75

MediaMusic 76

MediaPhoto 77

MediaVideo....78

HbbTV / MediaTek....80

Digital Recorder 82

About the Digital Recorder system 82

Settings 85

TV viewing with time shift 87

Archive recording – Direct recording 89

Archive playback 95

DR+ Streaming 103

External devices 108

Connections menu 108

Gaming mode 109

Devices to the connections AV/AVS 110

Devices to the HDMI connections 112

Digital Link HD 113

Devices to the PC IN connection 114

Sound components wizard 115

Connecting Loewe sound system 116

Connecting active loudspeakers 117

Adjusting the speaker system 117

Connecting audio amplifiers 120

Assignment of the digital audio input 121

Audio connection in HDMI/DVI devices 121

Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12) 121

External devices (continued) 122

The direct way to record 122

Timer recording with external devices 124

Operating Loewe equipment 125

Software update 126

Basic information 126

USB stick 126

Download 126

Software update 126

Input of characters 128

USB keyboard 128

Button combinations 128

Character table 129

Tilting the TV set 130

Troubleshooting....131

Technical data 134

General data....134

Electrical data 135

Signals via PC IN / HDMI 135

Connections (max. equipment) 136

MediaHome 137

Accessories....138

Upgrade Kits / Conversion Kits / Cables 139

Equipment variants.... 140

TV set equipment 140

Setup possibilities Individual 141

Environment....142

Glossary....144

EC Declaration of Conformity 149

Index 151

Service 154

Welcome

Thank you

for choosing a Loewe TV set!

Loewe stands for the highest demands in technology, design and user friendliness. This applies equally for TV, video and accessories.

In addition to the elegant design and the many different possible colour combinations and installation possibilities, your Loewe TV set also offers many technological options.

Loewe Image ^+

State-of-the-art Full-HD-LCD-displays with LED-Backlight Technology. The advantage of the LED-Backlight is in the reduced energy consumption and high contrast values.

24p films played by a connected HDMI unit can be displayed optimally.

Loewe Sound+

Loewe Sound ^+ contains sound processors that are optimally calibrated to the TV set and boasts a closed coverage construction type for the integrated loudspeakers.

Many Loewe TV sets are fitted with a digital multi-channel audio decoder for impressive 5.1 surround sound.

Loewe Media+

You can reach the MediaPortal via the MEDIA button on your remote control, giving you access to all multimedia functions of your TV set.

Loewe DR+

If the hard disc recorder DR+ ^(1) is integrated into your TV set, you can record TV programmes simply at the press of a button. Programmes currently being watched can be interrupted, rewound and played back from the desired point if needed.

Scope of delivery

  • LCD TV set
  • Table mount (assembled)
  • Mains cable
  • Antenna cable
  • Velcro cable ties
  • Remote control Assist with two batteries
  • TV quick guide

About this operating manual

For best results regarding safety and the longevity of the set, we recommend you read the chapter For your Safety (page 8) before switching it on for the first time.

The functions of the Loewe TV set are largely self-explanatory. However, should you have any questions, the integrated index and the info display (see page 15) can assist you further.

The index/glossary from page 144 onwards gives explanations of certain terms used in the TV set and the operating manual.

Paragraphs which begin with the symbol indicate important instructions, tips or conditions for the following settings.

Terms which you will find in the menus or printed on the remote control or TV set are written in bold type.

The necessary control elements are shown in the descriptions to the left of the text containing the instructions for action.

In addition to the remote control, a PC keyboard can be connected to one of the USB ports on your TV and then used to control your TV set (see also page 128).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - About this operating manual - 1

In the operating manual, this symbol indicates places in which the use of a keyboard is particularly advantageous.

Depending on the connected accessory equipment the menus in the TV set can differ from those described here.

All the station names, programme contents, the illustrated photos, titles, albums and album covers in this operating manual are examples.

In some countries, the stations also transmit interactive data services with their programmes (see page 52, Digital Teletext/MHEG-5), whereby the functions of individual keys are not available or only so to a limited extent.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - About this operating manual - 2

The symbol indicates which functions can differ for a loaded application.

The operating instructions for your TV set are updated at irregular intervals. We recommend checking now and then, especially after a software update.

For your safety

For your own safety and to prevent unnecessary damage to your device, read and comply with the following safety instructions:

Proper use and environmental conditions

This TV set is designed exclusively for reception and reproduction of video and audio signals and is designed for living rooms or office facilities, and should not be operated in rooms with high humidity, such as a bathroom, or sauna, or where there is a high concentration of dust (e.g. workshops). The manufacturer's warranty is only valid for use in the specified permissible environment.

If the set is used outdoors ensure that it is protected against moisture (rain, splashing water, or dew). High humidity and dust concentrations cause leak currents in the device, which can cause a shock hazard if the device is touched, or a fire.

If you have brought the set into a warm environment from the cold, then wait for about 1 hour before switching it on to avoid formation of condensation.

Do not place any objects filled with liquids on top of the appliance. Protect the appliance against dripping and splashing water.

Candles or naked flames must be kept away from the appliance at all times to prevent it from catching fire.

Warning sign with crossed-out symbols: no liability symbol and no candle

Never place the TV set in a position where it is exposed to vibrations. This can lead to material overload.

Transporting

Only transport the device in vertical position. Grasp the device on the upper and lower edges of the housing.

If the set has to be put down during packing/unpacking, place the TV set with the entire front surface lying flat on a soft underlay such as a blanket or the felt from the packing material.

The LCD screen is made of glass or plastic and can break if not handled properly.

Always wear rubber gloves to carry the TV set if the LCD screen is damaged and liquid crystal might be leaking out. In the case of skin contact immediately wash thoroughly with water.

Power supply

The wrong voltage can damage the set. This equipment must only be connected to a mains power supply which has the same voltage and frequency as that specified on the rating plate; use the mains cable provided. The mains plug of the TV set must be easily accessible so that the device can be disconnected from the mains at any time. When you unplug the mains plug, do not pull on the cable rather pull on the plug housing. The cable in the mains plug could be damaged and cause a short circuit the next time it is plugged in.

Lay out the mains cable in such a manner that it cannot be damaged. The mains cable must not be kinked or laid over sharp edges, stepped on or exposed to chemicals; The latter also applies for the entire equipment. A mains cable with damaged insulation can cause electrical shock and is a fire hazard.

Air circulation and high temperatures

The vent slots on the rear panel of the set must always be kept free. Please do not place newspapers or cloths on/over the TV.

Ensure that there is at least 10 cm free space on the sides and above the set for air circulation, if the set is placed in a cabinet or on a shelf.

Like any electronic device, your TV set requires air for cooling. Obstruction of the air circulation can cause fires.

The set is suitable for different installation solutions. See the

10 cm 10 cm 10 cm

instructions for assembly for the different installation solutions. Stand the TV set with the table or floor stand only on a level, sturdy, horizontal base. Particularly ensure that the set does not protrude to the front when placed in or on pieces of furniture. The TV set may only be operated horizontally, the vertical tilt must not be more than 10 degrees maximum. The TV set must never be operated on edge, lying on the ground or hanging from the ceiling.

Set up the device where it is not exposed to direct sunlight and where it is not exposed to additional warming through heating elements.

Prevent metal items, needles, paper clips, liquids, wax, or similar items, from getting into the interior of the device through the vent slots in the rear panel. Such objects can cause short circuits in the set, which could possibly cause a fire.

If something should get into the interior of the set then immediately unplug the mains plug of the device and contact customer service for more information.

For your safety

TV sets with 3D function

Read the following safety instructions before using the 3D function of your TV set.

Please only use Loewe 3D glasses (see Accessories on page 138) in conjunction with Loewe 3D TV sets.

People that have a visual disorder may not be able to perceive 3D effects or may only be able to perceive them to a limited extent. People that are sensitive to flickering images (e.g. those with epilepsy) should only use this product after having consulted their doctor.

It might take some time for you to get used to the 3D glasses and before you can perceive the 3D effects properly.

Stop using the 3D devices immediately if you experience any feelings of nausea, dizziness or malaise when viewing 3D content.

Supervise children whilst they are viewing 3D content, as they can be particularly sensitive to it.

Allow more time for a break when viewing 3D films, so that you are able to relax. Failure to do this could result in headaches, fatigue, dizziness or malaise.

Position yourself comfortably in front of the 3D TV set and ensure that you are seated firmly. By doing this, you will avoid any injuries that may arise due to reacting to extreme 3D content.

Switch off any artificial light sources (e.g. energy saving lamp) between the TV set and the 3D glasses. These could impair the infrared reception or the TV picture may flicker as a result.

Repairs and accessories

Never remove the back of the TV set yourself. Only have your TV device repaired or serviced by authorised television technicians.

Only use original accessories such as Loewe stands if possible (see Accessories on page 138.

Supervision

Do not allow children to use the TV set without supervision or to play in the immediate vicinity of the TV set. The set could tip over, be pushed off or pulled down from the stand surface and injure someone.

Do not allow the switched-on TV set to run unattended.

Volume

Loud music can lead to ear damage. Avoid extreme volume especially over long periods and when using headphones.

Thunder storms

Pull out the mains plug and all connected antenna cables from the TV set in a thunderstorm. Overvoltage caused by lightning can damage the set via the antenna system, as well as via the mains. The mains plug and all connected antenna cables should also be pulled out during long periods of absence.

Note on the LCD screen

The TV set you have purchased with LCD screen satisfies the most rigorous quality requirements and has been inspected relative to pixel errors. Despite our thorough care when manufacturing the display, it cannot be 100% guaranteed that no subpixel defects will be present due to technical reasons. Please understand that these types of effects, as long as they are within the standard of specified limits, cannot be considered as a device defect in terms of the guarantee.

Avoid displaying still images for long periods of time. It is possible that a copy of the image may remain.

Cleaning and care

Switch off the TV set at the main switch before cleaning.

Clean the TV set, the screen, and the remote control unit with a soft, moist, and clean cloth only, without any aggressive or scouring cleaning agents.

Sets with glass screens may be cleaned with a conventional glass cleaner.

Control unit front side of the device

M DR+ R ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬

USB recording is only possible for devices without DR+ (integrated hard disc recorder).

^2 Only for devices with DR+ (integrated hard disc recorder).

Functions of the operating elements

① Mains switch:

The mains switch is located on the bottom of the set. Always return the TV set to Standby mode before switching it off with the main switch.

② On/Off button:

Switch on from the standby mode Switch off to the standby mode

③ Display:

red = Standby
green = Operation
orange = Operation without on-screen display (Radio, EPG data capture, timer recording) or arch recording via USB ^(1) .

④ Display DR ^+ (2):

white= Digital Recorder inactive (no recording, no playback)

DR+ green = Digital Recorder active (offset TV viewing or archive playback)

DR+ red = Digital Recorder active (archive recording)

⑤ Infrared transmitter:

When showing 3D content, the 3D glasses Loewe Active Glasses 3D are controlled via the infrared sensor.

⑥ Button M:

Call the menu in the menu: up/down ▲ ▼

⑦ Button R:

Radio on/off (back to TV mode) Switch on the radio from the standby mode in the menu: down ▼

⑧ Button +:

Station up in the menu: to the right ▶

⑨ Button-:

Station down in the menu: to the left

Connections rear side of the device

Diagram of an electronic device rear panel with labeled ports and connectors, showing internal components like USB drive, I/O ports, and indicator lights.

① HDMI 1 - HDMI input 1
② HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2
③ PC IN - VGA/XGA input
④ AV - Euro-AV socket
⑤ LAN - Network connection
⑥ USB - USB connection
⑦ AUDIO IN - Audio input (analogue)
⑧ AUDIO DIGITAL OUT - Digital audio output
⑨ AUDIO DIGITAL IN - Digital audio input
⑩ CENTER IN - Centre audio input (analogue)
⑪ SERVICE - Service socket
⑫ ANT-TV - Antenna/cable analogue/digital ^(1)(2)
⑫ ANT SAT - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) ^11
⑫ ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) ^11,12
⑬ AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (analogue)

⑭ CI-COMMON INTERFACE - Common Interface 1 (CI slot 1)
⑮ CI-COMMON INTERFACE - Common Interface 2 (CI slot 2)
⑯ HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3
⑰ USB - USB connection
⑱ Headphones connection
⑲ AUDIO IN L - Audio in left (AVS)
⑳ AUDIO IN R - Audio in right (AVS)
②1 VIDEO IN - Video in (AVS)
22 AVS - S-Video connection (AVS)
23 220-240V\~50/60Hz - Mains connection
⑳ IR LINK - Infrared transmitter connection ^1
25 CONTROL - Rotating stand control
②6 RS-232C - Serial interface ^(1)

^1 Equipment and upgrade options, see page 140.

^17 The position of the aerial sockets depends on the tuner equipment.

Operating convenience

General information on menu operation

The operation can be divided basically into two areas: The operation of dropdown lists (e.g. station list, favourites list, EPG etc.) and the menu operation (TV menu etc.) for configuring your TV set.

If any questions arise during the operation of your TV set, an appropriate info screen can be accessed to help you by pressing the INFO button, see also info display on page 15.

Selection list (example: Station list)
STATION LIST HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV 0 VIDEO 1 Das Erste 2 ZDF 3 WDR Köln 4 Bayerisches FS 5 hr-furnsehen 6 Phoenix 7 BR-alpha 8 3sat 9 EinsExtra 10 EinsFestival 11 EinsPlus 12 ZDFinfokanal 13 ZDFdokukanal 14 ZDFthealerkan 15 arte 16 Klka 21:00:21:45 Urlaubsparodies - Toskana Switch to... Select abahan Favorites Scan stations Change stations Sort alphabetically

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - General information on menu operation - 2

▲▼◀▶ You move the cursor by pressing the ring (up, down, left, right).

P+/P- If more selection options are available than will fit on one screen page page ↓↑ is displayed. You can scroll the pages with P+/P-.

OK The OK button calls the selection or confirms the setting.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - General information on menu operation - 3

With the coloured buttons you can select different options depending on the application. The assignment of the coloured keys is shown at the bottom of the screen.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - General information on menu operation - 4

INFO: Additional information about the screen page.

END: Close/exit dropdown list.

Inputs with the numeric buttons
LOEWE Connect 40 3D - General information on menu operation - 5

Letters have to be entered for specific functions. When using the remote control, press the numeric buttons just as on a mobile phone keypad (0-9) until the desired symbol is displayed. The available letters are printed on the individual numeric buttons.

See page 129 for a detailed overview of the available characters.

Menus for the individual modes (TV, Radio, PIP, EPG, Teletext, MediaPortal and DR archive/Video archive ^(1) ) are called with the MENU button.

The menus are displayed at the bottom of the screen. At the top you get additional information about the selected menu item (see info display on page 15).

In normal TV mode, without other displays.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Menu operation (example: TV menu) - 1

MENU: Call TV menu.
PICTURE Here you can adjust among other things: Contrast, colour, brightness, picture adjustment, sharpness, picture format. TV MENU Picture Sound Recording Connections Settings Picture adjustment ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Menu operation (example: TV menu) - 3

SelectPicture,

▼ go to the menu line below.

Select Brightness,

▼ go to the menu line below.

◀ ▶ Set Brightness.

▲ Return to the Brightness menu line to make other picture settings.

◀ ▶ Select more ...

OK call more ... functions.

▶ Select Auto format,

go to the menu line below.

◀ ▶ Select on / off.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Menu operation (example: TV menu) - 4

END: Conclude the settings.

You can find a diagram of the menu structure in the overview diagrams, page 16 and after.

^1 Only for TV sets that contain an integrated hard disc (DR+), a connected external hard disc (USB recording) or that have an archive available on the network (DR streaming).

Operating convenience

Operating convenience with wizards

For many settings your TV set has user guidance with wizards which guide you through the settings step by step.

Overview of wizards

Initial installation

The initial installation wizard helps you with the initial installation and connection of any existing equipment (see page 22).

Setting up the antenna

You enter in the antenna wizard which antenna signals are available to you. The antenna wizard is called in initial installation (see page 22). You can also call the antenna wizard in the TV menu under Connections → Antenna DVB → Antenna DVB-S ^(1) or Antenna DVB-T.

Search wizard

If you want to search for new stations after the initial installation, or if you have set up your antenna for the first time, then you can handle this task with the help of the search wizard (see page 42). You will find the search wizard in the TV menu under Settings → Stations → Search wizard.

Connecting sound components

The sound component wizard ensures that the components which reproduce the TV sound are correctly registered, connected and set. It is started automatically at the end of the initial installation wizard but can also be called separately (see page 115). You will find the sound components wizard in the TV menu under Connections → Sound components.

Programming and managing recordings

The recording wizard helps you when programming a recording using video, DVD or digital recorder (DR+ for devices with an integrated hard disc or USB recording for those without it) see page 122 onwards).

Software update

You can download the latest software for your TV set from the Loewe Service site and update using a USB stick (see page 126).

Operating convenience

MediaPortal

The MediaPortal is the central overview page for your TV set's functions. From here you can gain access to TV channels, local and online media, digital radio and to the archive of the Digital Recorder ^1 .

Call MediaPortal

MEDIA

MEDIA: Call MediaPortal.

MEDIA PORTAL TV CVB radio Internet radio DR archive DR + Streaming MediaHome MediaNet Video podcasts RECOMMENDATIONS Focus TV Focus Online ZDF BR Filmtrailer.com RADIO DELUXE LOUNGE RADIO 30self - den Fussball Radio Klassik Radio

The individual media and the various functions are displayed at the top of the MediaPortal.

The number of selectable items varies depending on the TV equipment, network connection, available media/media servers and connected appliances.

The lower part of the MediaPortal contains the selectable recommendations.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call MediaPortal - 2

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select menu item, OK call.

Description of the individual functions:

TV: Here you call the TV mode of your TV set. See page 30 for further information.

DVB radio: Use this to open the DVB radio mode of your TV set to listen to digital radio stations over DVB. See page 52 for further information.

Internet radio: Use this to open the Internet radio mode of your TV set to listen to digital radio stations over the Internet. The menu item only appears if an Internet connection is available. See page 54 for further information.

DR archive ^1 / Video archive: Using the DR archive, you have access to the recorded programmes on the integrated hard disc (for TV sets with DR ^+ ) or to the recordings on a storage device connected via USB. If the TV set does not have an integrated hard disc or a storage device connected via USB, the menu item Video archive will only appear if a network connection to a Loewe TV set with a shared DR archive is available.

See page 82 for further information.

DR+ Streaming ^41 : Here, you can switch off the TV set in the advanced standby mode for DR+ Streaming. The menu item only appears if the TV set is with an integrated hard disc (DR+) and the DR archive is being shared with other TV sets. See page 103 for further information.

MediaHome: Here you have access to your personal memory media, e.g. to all memory media connected via USB or to networks with which your TV set is connected. See page 60 onwards for further information.

MediaNet: Here you have access to multimedia content in the Internet as well as a high-quality web browser. See page 60 onwards for further information.

Video podcasts: Here you have access to video podcasts and Web TV from the Internet. The menu item only appears if an Internet connection is available. See page 75 for further information.

Index: Here you have access to the index integrated in the TV set. See page 15 for further information.

Operating convenience

The index in the TV set

The index explains the TV functions and the terms that you may be confronted with when operating the TV set. You can start all the assistants and many of the operating functions directly from here.

Alphabetic sorting is preceded by the items Menu language, Energy efficiency, Integrated features and Repeat initial installation.

Call index

MEDIA

MEDIA: Call MediaPortal.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call index - 1

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select Index, OK call.

You will see an info text for the highlighted keyword in the info display.

You can select your language for operating the TV set. INDEX Menu language Energy efficiency Integrated features Repeat Initial installation * Access code Automatic dimming - Room Automatic station programming Activate Select Blue Previous/make letter Page 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call index - 3

If an OK symbol appears in the marked line, this function can be called directly with OK.

Selecting a keyword

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Selecting a keyword - 1

Enter initial letters with the numeric buttons like with a mobile phone keypad (see page 12).

or go with:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Selecting a keyword - 2

◀ ▶ to the preceding / next letters,
▼ ▲ from line to line,

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Selecting a keyword - 3

P+/P− scroll backwards or forwards in whole pages.

Example: You want to have the TV set switch off automatically at a specific time:

Select the keyword Switch off → Automatic, with OK you can activate the setting and with ← back again.

The info display

The info display provides an info text appropriate to the on-screen display that can assist you further with the operation of your TV set. Together with the index it makes for a comfortable operating system.

→ An on-screen display is faded in.

INFO

The factory setting is that the info display is shown automatically for each menu item. In this case you can temporarily hide the info texts with the INFO button.

The automatic info display can be hidden via a menu setting. Then it can be displayed temporarily by pressing the INFO button.

SETTINGS Here, you can search for stations automatically or manually as well as set the menu language, timer functions, parental lock, on-screen displays, etc. TV MENU Settings Station Picture Sound Recording

An INFO icon at the bottom right above the menu bar also tells you that an info text is available.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - The info display - 2

If an info text over several pages is available the number of available pages and P+P− Page ↓↑ is displayed in the Info window. You can scroll through the individual info pages with P+ and P−.

Permanently display or hide the automatic info display

Once you have become familiar with how to operate the TV set, you can switch off the automatic info display.

→ In normal TV mode, without other displays.

MENU

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Permanently display or hide the automatic info display - 1

◀ ▶ Select Settings,
▼ go to the menu line below.

▶ Select Miscellaneous,

▼ go to the menu line below.

▶ Select On-screen displays,

▼ go to the menu line below.

▶ Select Automatic info,

▼ go to the menu line below: yes / no.

Operating convenience

TV menu – Overview diagram
LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Operating convenience - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["TV menu"] --> B["Picture Sound"]
    A --> C["Recording"]
    A --> D["Connections"]
    A --> E["Settings"]

    B --> B1["3D"]
    B --> B2["Picture adjustment"]
    B --> B3["Contrast"]
    B --> B4["Colour intensity"]
    B --> B5["Colour temperature"]
    B --> B6["Brightness"]
    B --> B7["Sharpness"]
    B --> B8["Digital Noise Control (DNC) more..."]

    C --> C1["Sound mode"]
    C --> C2["Dolby PLII mode¹"]
    C --> C3["Sound adjustment"]
    C --> C4["Audio commentary volume²"]
    C --> C5["Headphone volume"]
    C --> C6["Loudness"]
    C --> C7["Sound-picture synchronisation more..."]

    D --> D1["Recording wizard"]
    D --> D2["Antenna DVB"]
    D --> D3["AV connecting settings"]
    D --> D4["Miscellaneous"]
    D --> D5["Digital Link Plus"]
    D --> D6["Decoder stations⁴"]
    D --> D7["Remote TV switch on via Digital Link"]
    D --> D8["Assign digital audio input"]
    D --> D9["Gaming mode"]

    E --> E1["Stations"]
    E --> E2["Search wizard"]
    E --> E3["Manual adjustment"]
    E --> E4["Change stations"]
    E --> E5["Select/change favourites"]

    F["Parental lock"] --> F1["Timer functions"]
    F --> F2["Language"]
    F --> F3["Energy efficiency"]
    F --> F4["Miscellaneous"]

    G["Image+"] Active
Auto dimming - Room⁶
Auto dimming - Video (vBD+)
Film quality improvement (DMM)
Auto format
Picture format
Move picture up/down¹¹
PC IN display¹³] --> H["Loudspeaker sound¹¹<br>Headphone sound¹¹<br>Auto volume<br>AV output signal<br>Maximum volume<br>max. switch on volume<br>Volume adjustment for current station<br>Balance<br>Auto speech detection"]

    I["Menu items appear depending on the signal source currently selected (DVB or analogue) and/or at definite presettings in the relevant menus. For individual details, see the corresponding chapter of the operating instructions."]
    J["Menu item only appears if the audio commentary is activated and available (see page 41)."]

Menu items appear depending on the signal source currently selected (DVB or analogue) and/or at definite presettings in the relevant menus. For individual details, see the corresponding chapter of the operating instructions.

^12 Menu item only appears if the audio commentary is activated and available (see page 41).

^8 Menu item can only be selected if a valid signal is present at the PC IN input.

^4 Menu item only available if a Decoder has been selected as Device at connection AV (see page 108).

^15 Menu item only appears in sets with DR ^+ .

^16 Menu item not available if the TV set is showing 3D content.

Operating convenience

Radio menu – Overview diagram
LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Operating convenience - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Radio menu"] --> B["Sound"]
    A --> C["Stations"]
    A --> D["Timer functions"]
    B --> E["Sound mode"]
    B --> F["Dolby PLII mode¹¹"]
    B --> G["Sound adjustment"]
    B --> H["Headphone volume"]
    B --> I["Loudness"]
    B --> J["more..."]
    C --> K["Search wizard"]
    C --> L["Manual adjustment"]
    C --> M["Change stations"]
    C --> N["Select/change favourites"]
    D --> O["Switch off once"]
    D --> P["Switch off daily"]
    D --> Q["One-time alarm"]
    D --> R["Wake up Mon-Fri"]
    D --> S["Wake up Sat"]
    D --> T["Wake up Sun"]
    D --> U["Wake up with"]
    D --> V["Wake up signal volume"]
    E --> W["Auto volume"]
    E --> X["Maximum volume"]
    E --> Y["max. switch on volume"]
    E --> Z["Volume adjustment for current station"]
    E --> AA["Balance"]
    E --> AB["Auto speech detection"]

Other menus— Overview diagram
LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Operating convenience - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Media menu"] --> B["Network settings"]
    B --> C["Network access"]
    B --> D["Other"]
    A --> E["Photo settings"]
    A --> F["Music settings"]
    A --> G["Video settings"]

    H["EPG menu"] --> I["Station selection"]
    H --> J["Data capture"]
    J --> K["off"]
    J --> L(on (only for DVB)]
    J --> M(on (for DVB + analogue)]
    H --> N["Switch on TV when marked"]
    N --> O["no"]
    N --> P["yes"]
    H --> Q["Sorting"]
    Q --> R["corresponding to station list"]
    Q --> S["chronologically"]

    T["Teletext menu"] --> U["Station selection"]
    T --> V["Newsflash"]
    T --> W["Reveal"]
    T --> X["Recording wizard"]
    T --> Y["Settings"]
    Y --> Z["Preview pages"]
    Y --> AA["Sub-title pages"]
    Y --> AB["Personal text pages"]
    Y --> AC["Character set"]

Initial installation

Installing the TV set

Installation options

Your TV set is supplied equipped with a table stand. Further set-up solutions are available for purchase from your Loewe dealer. Only use Loewe installation solutions (e.g. wall mounts, floor stand) that are included in the Accessories – Setup possibilities chapter on page 141.

After selecting an installation option, read the appropriate assembly instructions.

Installation notes

Choose a place for installing your TV where no bright light or sunlight shines directly onto the screen. This could cause reflections which impair the picture.

3 times the screen diagonal can be taken as a guide value or the viewing distance (e.g. for 40-inch set approx. 3m for SD signal). The viewing distance can be reduced with an HD signal.

Set covers

Covers for rear and side connections

To remove the rear cable cover, pull the two recessed handles at the bottom and drop down the cover.

To fit the cover, insert the lugs at the top edge of the cover into the corresponding cut-outs in the rear panel and push up the cover until it snaps in.

The side cover of the TV set can also be completely removed. For this, open it as far as it will go and gently pull on the open cover.

The cover detaches from the holder and gives free access to the connection area. To replace the cover, simply push it until it latches back into place.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Covers for rear and side connections - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical or electrical component with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

Connecting the TV Set

Connecting to the mains

Remove the cover for the connections.

Connect the TV set to a 220-240V mains socket:

First plug the small plug of the power cable into the mains connection on the back of the TV and then the large mains plug into a mains socket.

Diagram showing a plug inserted into a computer with an 8-pin cable connected to the screen, indicating connection or wiring.

Connecting antennas

Cable (analogue) / DVB-C / DVB-T antenna:

Plug the antenna cable of antenna, cable system or room antenna into the ANT TV socket.

If you want to use analogue cables / DVB-C connection and a DVB-T antenna together, use an external antenna switch (available from your dealer).

Satellite antenna DVB-S:

If the TV set is equipped with a Single or Twin satellite tuner (means of upgrade kit / conversion kit), the ANT-SAT and ANT-SAT2 sockets are available.

Depending on the used satellite system, connect a connecting cable from the multi-switch or directly from the LNC to the ANT-SAT and ANT-SAT2 sockets of the TV set respectively.

When connecting the TV set to a single cable community antenna, connect the ANT-SAT and ANT-SAT2 sockets directly to the appropriate SAT antenna socket. Ask your dealer if required.

an. cable / DVB-C R TV DVB-T 9 DVB-S

Initial installation

Connecting the TV set to the Home network

You can connect your TV set to the home network by a wire connection (Ethernet, Powerline) or if available ^1 by a wireless radio connection (WLAN). Please contact your specialist dealer for more information on Powerline.

For the network adapter configuration, see page 63.

Under no circumstances may the TV set be wired and at the same time connected by a wireless connection to the same network, e.g. router. This may cause severe operational faults.

Example for a wire connection

Connect the LAN socket of your TV set to the LAN switch/router of your home network with a network cable (available from your dealer).

LAN switch/router Homeserver, e.g. PC TV set

Example for a wireless connection ^(1)

You can connect the TV set to your home network by a wireless radio connection via the WLAN antenna inside the set.

LAN switch/router Homeserver, e.g. PC TV set

^1 Equipment and upgrade options, see page 140.

Initial installation

Bundling the Cables

The cables connected to the TV set can be bundled and fixed to the back of the housing using the Velcro cable tie provided.

Then fit the cover for the connections (see page 18).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Bundling the Cables - 1

natural_image Interior view of a computer monitor showing internal circuitry and ventilation slots (no text or symbols visible)

Preparing the remote control unit

Inserting or replacing batteries

Press on the embossed arrow whilst pushing the battery cover down. Only use leak-proof micro-cells of the LR 03 (AAA) Alkali-Manganese type. Do not use different types of batteries and old and new batteries together. Pay attention to the correct polarity of + and - when inserting the batteries.

If the batteries are too weak after longer use, the TV set prompts you to change the batteries.

Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally friendly way (see page 142). Push the cover back on from below after inserting the batteries.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Inserting or replacing batteries - 1

natural_image 3D rendering of a remote control casing with a blue internal component labeled '4AA LFP03' and a small battery on the left (no text beyond label)

Adjusting the remote control for operating the TV set

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Adjusting the remote control for operating the TV set - 1

Press the TV button.

See page 125 for how to operate other Loewe appliances and how to reprogramme the remote control buttons.

Initial installation

Turning the set on/off

Switching the TV set to standby mode

Press the power switch on the bottom of the set.

The display in the control panel on the front lights up first orange and then red. The set is now in standby mode.

M R Control unit Mains switch

Switching the TV on/off on the control unit

To switch the TV set into Operating mode or switch it off into Standby mode, press the middle of the On/Off button for about 2 seconds.

Display

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the TV on/off on the control unit - 1

Meaning of the display colour of the LEDs in the On/Off button:

Red: Standby mode

Green: TV set is switched on

Orange: Radio mode, the device receives EPG data, timer recording is active or archive recording via USB is active ^1 .

Switching the set on with the remote control

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the set on with the remote control - 1

Press the on/off button

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the set on with the remote control - 2

or numeric buttons

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the set on with the remote control - 3

or TV button

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the set on with the remote control - 4

or OK button – station list is called

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the set on with the remote control - 5

or MEDIA button – MediaPortal is called.

Switching the set off with the remote control

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the set off with the remote control - 1

Press the on/off button.

Before switching off the set with the mains switch, we recommend you to switch it to standby mode.

Switch on in Radio mode

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switch on in Radio mode - 1

Press R on the TV control unit.

or: Press the AUDIO button on the remote control (radio mode, see page 52).

Initial installation

First installation wizard

Initial installation after switching on for the first time

This wizard starts automatically after the set is switched on for the first time, however it can also be called later manually in the TV index, see Repeat initial installation on page 15.

If at least one station is locked the access code must be entered before repeating initial installation (see Parental lock on page 56).

First installation wizard routine

The routine of the first installation wizard depend on the selected settings.

Language
FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD Which language do you want to use for operation? INITIAL INSTALLATION Language Sprache D Language GB Language F Lingua I Idioma E Taal NL Jazyk CZ Tλωροσο G R Jezyk PL Nysilv H Kieli FIN Jazyk SK Lisan TR Sprak S Sprag DK Idioma P R J u x R U S Sprak N Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - First installation wizard routine - 2

▲▼◄► Select language.

Selecting the language of the user guidance is the wizard's first step. Then you simply follow the instructions on your TV screen.

OK Proceed.

Energy efficiency
INITIAL INSTALLATION Energy efficiency Eco standard Premium mode Shop mode Proceed Back

▶ Select Energy efficiency.

Decide how energy efficiently you want to operate your TV set. The value for the contrast (and thus the brightness of the background lighting) is adapted and the automatic dimmer activated or deactivated (see page 34) depending on the presetting.

Energy

efficiency (continued)

Eco standard:

The emphasis for home use is on low energy consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.

Premium mode:

This mode optimises the settings to a brighter environment at a higher energy consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.

Shop mode:

The picture settings are aligned to operation in the presentation room. The automatic dimmer is deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes, the energy consumption is not reduced.

The presetting can be changed later in the TV menu under Picture → Picture adjustment → Presettings (see page 34) or under Settings → Energy efficiency.

OK proceed.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK proceed. - 1
Location of TV set

INITIAL INSTALLATION Location of TV set (1/2) A Austria B Belgium CH Switzerland CZ Czech Republic D Germany DK Denmark E Spain F France GB United Kingdom IRL Ireland NZ S Netherlands P Portugal PL Poland Sweden H Hungary SLO Slovenia FIN Finland AUS Australia NZ New Zealand Proceed Back

▲▼◄► Select Location of TV set (national defaults are adopted).

OK Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Proceed - 1

Selecting antennas
INITIAL INSTALLATION Connect antenna cable(s) Antenna cable(s) for to antenna socket(s): Antenna/cable (analogue) ANT TV D V S - T ANT AN T T V DVB-C ANT TV DVB-S (cable 1) ANT SAT DVB-S (cable 2) ANT SAT2 Proceed Connect to disconnect Back

▲▼ Select antenna cable.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Proceed - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Proceed - 4

Yellow button: Connect/disconnect antenna cable.

Antenna/cable (analogue): analogue stations via cable/antenna

DVB-T: digital terrestrial stations

DVB-C: digital stations via cable

DVB-S (cable 1): digital stations via satellite

DVB-S (cable 2): digital stations via satellite

continued on next page →

Initial installation

Selecting antennas (continued)

The selection options for the aerials depend on the receiver units installed or upgraded at the factory (see also page 140).

Depending on which antenna(s) was (were) selected, the appropriate settings are called later during the routine.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Initial installation - 1

Subtitle and audio languages (DVB)

OK proceed.
INITIAL INSTALLATION Subtitle and audio languages (DVB) Favoured subtitle language English Alternative subtitle language German Favoured audio language German Alternative audio language German Audio commentary off ● F r e c e d ▼ Back

▲▼◄► Select desired languages and alternative languages for subtitles and audio for DVB programmes (see page 57). Set up audio commentary for the visually impaired (see page 41).

OK Proceed.

Logical Channel Number

INITIAL INSTALLATION Logical Channel Number Accept Logical Channel Number no * * * yes Proceed Back

◀ ▶ Accept Logical Channel Number no / yes.

In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S) are transmitted with a preset channel number per station, known as "Logical Channel Numbers" – "LCN".

If you indicate yes here, the specified programme numbers will be adopted as station memory locations and the stations of the preferred signal sources sorted by LCN. There may be gaps in the numbering of the station list depending on the LCN.

OK Proceed.

Depending on which antennas (DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S) were selected, the appropriate settings appear below.

Setting options for DVB-T reception:

If you have not selected a DVB-T antenna in the antenna selection: Continue with setting options for DVB-C reception on page 24.

Settings

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-T) Scrambled stations no yes Search method Channel search Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for DVB-T reception: - 2

▲▼◄► Select and adapt settings for DVB-T reception.

Encrypted stations

You can state whether coded stations are to be searched for in the search/update. Select yes to save all found scrambled stations. However, these stations can only be received in connection with a CA module and the appropriate Smart Card. Handling of the CA module is described on page 59.

If a CA module with a SmartCard is already plugged in for the station search, all the stations which this module can descramble are also saved when no is preset.

Search method

If you want to run the station search independently of the channel grid, select frequency search for the search method.

OK Proceed.

Supply voltage

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-T) Antenna Supply voltage no (0V) yes (5V) Proceed Back

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for DVB-T reception: - 4

◀ ▶ Select supply voltage no / yes.

Use a DVB-T antenna that requires a supply voltage (active antenna) and which is not already supplied via a power adapter, then select yes (5V) for the antenna's power supply.

How to align your DVB-T antenna is described on page 29.

OK Proceed

Initial installation

Setting options for DVB-C reception:

If you have not selected a DVB-C antenna in the antenna selection: Continue with Setting options for DVB-S reception (see right hand column).

The normal DVB-C settings are derived from the selection of the location and do not need to be changed.

Settings

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-C) Scrambled stations no yes Search method Channel search Start frequency 047.0 MHz Network ID none Symbol rate 1 (DVB-C) 6875 Symbol rate 2 (DVB-C) 6900 QAM modulation 1 64 QAM modulation 2 256 © Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Settings - 2
Encrypted stations

▲▼◄► Select and adapt settings for DVB-C reception.

You can state whether coded stations are to be searched for in the search/update. Select yes to save all found scrambled stations. However, these stations can only be received in connection with a CA module and the appropriate Smart Card. Handling of the CA module is described on page 59.

If a CA module with a SmartCard is already plugged in for the station search, all the stations which this module can descramble are also saved when no is preset.

Search method

If you want to run the station search independently of the channel grid, select frequency search for the search method.

Start frequency

The DVB stations are only searched for in the frequency range above the start frequency.

Network ID

Only change these defaults if you are familiar with other symbol rates and types of modulation or if you have to specify the network ID for your cable network. In the case of small cable networks fed directly from the satellite, the rate of 6900 might have to be replaced by 6111. Your cable provider has the information you need.

Symbol rate

QAM modulation

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - QAM modulation - 1

OK Proceed.

Setting options for DVB-S reception:

If you have not selected a DVB-S antenna in the antenna selection: Continue with Setting options for all types of reception on page 28.

The normal DVB-S settings are derived from the selection of the location and do not need to be changed in most cases.

Select satellite installation

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) Select satellite installation Single satellite 2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox 2 satellites on toneburst switch Max. 4 satellites on DISEqC multiswitch DISEqC one cable communal system other communal installation Propard Back

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for DVB-S reception: - 2

▲▼ Selecting the satellite system. Specify how you receive which satellite(s) (single satellite or type of satellite system). Ask your dealer if required.

Single satellite

Reception of a single satellite via a connected LNC (LNB). See page 25 for settings.

2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox

Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs (LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a 22 kHz switchbox. See page 25 for settings.

2 satellites on toneburst switch

Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs (LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a toneburst switch. See page 25 for settings.

Max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch

The TV set controls a DiSEqC multiswitch to which up to four LNCs (LNBs) for different satellites are connected. See page 26 for settings.

DiSEqC one cable communal system

Select setting if the TV set is connected to a DiSEqC single-cable system (according to EN 50494). Several Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable. See page 26 for settings.

other communal installation

Select setting if the TV set is connected to a single-cable system (without DiSEqC). Several Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable. Unlike a DiSEqC single-cable system there are restrictions in the range of certain reception frequencies in single-cable community systems. See page 27 for settings.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - other communal installation - 1

OK Proceed

(to the appropriate page of the satellite system).

Initial installation

Setting options for the satellite system (single satellite):
Select single satellite
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) Select single satellite Astra1 19.2°E H o t B i r d 1 3° E Astra2 28.2°E Astra3 23.5°E Atlantic Bird1 12,5 °W Atlantic Bird2 8° W Atlantic Bird3 5° W Eurobird1 28.5°E Eurobird 9A 9° E Eutelsat W2 16° E Eutelsat W3A 7° E Eutelsat W4 36° E Intelsat10 02 1° W Nillesat 7° W Pan Am Sat 43° W Sinus2/3 5° E T e l e k o m 2 C 5° W T e l e k o m 2 D 8° W Telestar12 12,5° W T h o r 2 / 3 0 , 8° W Turksat 42° E H I s p a s Hellas Sat2 39° E

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Initial installation - 2

▲▼ Selectsatellite, OK Proceed.
High band
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) High band yes (with 0/22 kHz) Proceed Back

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Initial installation - 4
◀ ▶ Highbandno / yes.

Specify here whether the high band of the selected satellite is to be searched in addition to the low band.

OK Proceed.
LNB frequencies
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) LNB frequencies Low band 9750 High band 10600 A F: a c d Back

Set LNB frequencies.

Normally, you do not need to change the values for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency (important for the frequency display).

OK Proceed.

(with Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued) on page 27).

Setting options for the satellite system (2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox / 2 satellites on toneburst switch):
Satellite selection
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB 5) Satellite selection Satellite 1 Astrol 19.2°E Satellite 2 Hot Bird 13°E

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Initial installation - 7
▲▼ Select Satellite 1 / Satellite 2, ▶ select satellites from list,

OK Proceed
LNB frequencies (22 kHz switchbox)
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-5) LNB frequencies ASTRA1 19.2°E 9750 MHz Hot Bird 13°E 9750 MHz ● P r e c s e d Black

LNB frequencies (toneburst switch)
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) I/O frequencies ASTRA1 19,2°E Low band 9750 MHz ASTRA1 19,2°E High band 10600 MHz Hot Bird 13°E Low band 9750 MHz Hot Bird 13°E High band 10600 MHz Pricsed Back

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Initial installation - 10
Set LNB frequencies.

Normally, you do not need to change the values for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency (important for the frequency display).

OK Proceed

(with Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued) on page 27).

Initial installation

Setting options for the satellite system (max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch):

Settings

DiSEqC

multiswitch

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) Repeat rate none Control voltage 13/18V on 22kHz signal Band Toneburst off F r o c e d 8 a k

▲▼◄► Select and adapt settings for the DiSEqC multi-switch.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for the satellite system (max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch): - 2

Repeat rate

The refresh rate determines how often a DiSEqC command is output. A refresh is only necessary with cascaded systems.

Control voltage

The control voltage controls the switching of the polarisation level (horizontal/vertical) in non-DiSEqC capable components (e.g. control of single LNBs via DiSEqC multiswitch).

22kHz signal

The 22kHz signal controls the switching between high and low band in the Band setting. The Position setting controls the selection of the satellites in non-DiSEqC capable components.

Toneburst

The Toneburst controls the selection of the satellites in non-DiSEqC but toneburst capable components with the Position and Option settings.

OK Proceed

Satellite selection

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) Satellite selection Satellite 1 Astral 19.2"E Satellite 2 Hot Bird 13"E Satellite 3 Eutelsat W2 16"E Satellite 4 none © Proceed Back

▲▼ Select Satellite 1 ... Satellite 4,

▶ select satellites from list,

OK Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Proceed - 2

LNB frequencies

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) LNB frequencies ASTRA1 19.2°E Low band 9750 MHz ASTRA1 19.2°E High band 10600 MHz Hot Bird 13°E Low band 9750 MHz Hot Bird 13°E High band 10600 MHz Eutelsat W2 16°E Low band 9750 MHz Eutelsat W2 16°E High band 10600 MHz

Set LNB frequencies.

You do not normally need to change the values.

OK Proceed

(with Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued) on page 27).

Setting options for the satellite system (DiSEqC one cable communal system):

DiSEqC one

cable

communal

system

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-5) Select DISEqC single cable communal installation DELTA SUM-514 DELTA SUM-516 DELTA SUM-518 DELTA SUM-918 DELTA SUM-928 KATHREIN EXR-551 KATHREIN EXR-552 KATHREIN EXR-501 Proceed

▲▼ Select DiSEqC single cable communal installation.

OK Proceed.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for the satellite system (DiSEqC one cable communal system): - 2

Satellite

selection

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-5) Satellite selection Satellite 1 Astra1 19.2°E P r o c e d Black

▶ Select satellites from list,

OK Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for the satellite system (DiSEqC one cable communal system): - 4

LNB

frequencies

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) LNB frequencies Low band 9750 MHz High band 10600 MHz

Set LNB frequencies.

Normally, you do not need to change the values for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency (important for the frequency display).

OK Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for the satellite system (DiSEqC one cable communal system): - 6

Manual

registration

(for socket

ANT SAT)

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-5) Manual registration (for socket ANT SAT) Transmission channel 1 2 3 Transmission frequency 1284 PIN protection no Define/change PIN 0000 Proceed

▲▼◄► Select and adjust settings for the DiSEqC single cable communal installation.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for the satellite system (DiSEqC one cable communal system): - 8

Transmission Select the desired transmission channel and the corre-channel/frequency sponding transmission frequency.

PIN protection If your system is designed for it, it is possible to protect your used transmission data from use by other subscribers with a PIN.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for the satellite system (DiSEqC one cable communal system): - 9

OK Proceed

(wi Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued) in page 27).

Initial installation

Setting options for the satellite system (other communal installation):

Select single satellite

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) Select single satellite Astra1 19.2°E Hot Bird 13°E Astra2 28.2°E Astra3 23.5°E Atlantic Bird1 12,5 °W Atlantic Bird2 8°W Atlantic Bird3 5°W Eurobird1 28.5°E Eurobird 9A 9°E Eutelsat W2 10°E Eutelsat W3A 7°E Eutelsat W4 36°E Hellas Sat2 39°E Intelsat10 02 1°W Intelsat901 18°W Nilesat 7°W Pan Am Sat 43°W Sinus2/3 5°E Telekom 2 C 5°W Telekom 2 D 8°W Telestar12 12.5°W Thor 2 / 3 0 , 8°W Türksat 42°E Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for the satellite system (other communal installation): - 2

LNB settings

▲▼ Selectsatellite, OK Proceed.

INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S) LNB frequency 9750 MHz Supply voltage off P r o c e d Black

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for the satellite system (other communal installation): - 4

LNC frequency

▲▼◄► Select and adapt settings.

Normally, you do not need to change the values for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency (important for the frequency display).

Supply voltage

If your set is connected to a single-cable system without external voltage supply, you can connect the antenna supply (13V or 18V / max. 450mA).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for the satellite system (other communal installation): - 5

OK Proceed

(with Setting options for all types of reception on page 28).

Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued):

Test reception

FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD You should now receive a picture and sound from the following satellite: ASTRA1 19,2°E AIN LEVEL If not, please align your dish correctly. If however it is correctly aligned and you have an older version you can proceed with Ⓞ.

After you have made the previous settings, you should receive picture and sound of the selected satellites (only possible for Astra1 and HOTBIRD).

OK Proceed.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued): - 2

Settings

INITIAL INSTALLATION (ASTRA1 19,2°E) Scrambled stations no yes Search method Channel search Symbol rate 1 (DVB-S) 27500 Symbol rate 2 (DVB-S) 22000 Proceed Back

▲▼◄► Select and adapt settings.

If several satellites are received, the following settings must be made for every satellite. The scope of the settings may differ depending on the selected satellite.

Encrypted stations

You can state whether coded stations are to be searched for in the search/update. Select yes to save all found scrambled stations. However, these stations can only be received in connection with a CA module and the appropriate Smart Card. Handling of the CA module is described on page 59.

If a CA module with a SmartCard is already plugged in for the station search, all the stations which this module can descramble are also saved when no is preset.

Search method

If you want to run the station search independently of the channel grid, select frequency search for the search method.

Symbol rates

The symbol rates are specified by the satellite provider and do not normally need to be changed.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued): - 4

OK Proceed

Initial installation

Setting options for all types of reception:

Favoured signal source

INITIAL INSTALLATION Favoured signal source DVB-T DVB-C ASTRAI 19.2°E Antenna/cable (analogue) Proceed Back

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for all types of reception: - 2

▲▼ Select favoured signal source.

Select the signal source from a list, the station of which is to be at the top of your station list (starting with station slot 1).

The listed signal sources depend on the selected antennas and, if the set is equipped with a satellite tuner, the type of satellite system used and the received satellites.

OK Proceed.

Overview of settings for station search

FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD Your TV set will perform the automatic search with the following settings: Location of your TV set United Kingdom Signal source(s) Antenna/cable (analogue) D V B -T D V B -C D V B -S Installation satellite Single satellite (ASTRA1 19.2°E) Favoured signal source ASTRA1 19.2°E © Start automatic search Back

You will see a list of the selected settings. You can go back in steps with the ◀ button to make any changes to the settings.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for all types of reception: - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting options for all types of reception: - 5

The set now searches for TV and radio stations.

The stations found in the automatic search are divided into the appropriate station blocks depending on the previously selected antenna cables (signal sources). Subsequently the stations can only be re-sorted within these blocks.

At the beginning of the station list you will find the block with the stations of the preferred signal source. Any mixed sorting of stations from different signal sources is only possible with the favourites list.

Info TV stations

FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD

The automatic TV station search and sorting has ended.

966 new TV station(s) has (have) been found.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Start automatic search. - 1

The number of found TV stations is displayed.

OK Proceed

Structure TV station list

FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD: STRUCTURE OF TV STATION LIST

The TV stations found in the automatic search were divided into appropriate station blocks according to the previously selected antenna cables (signal sources). The stations can only be reorganised later within these blocks. The block with the stations of your favoured signal source is at the top of the station list.

Signal source

ASTRA1 19,2°E

DVB-C

DVB-T

Antenna/cable

Associated station numbers

1-900

901-1300

1301-1400

1401-1500

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Start automatic search. - 2

The structure of the TV station list is displayed.

OK Proceed

Info radio stations

FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD

The automatic radio station search and sorting has ended.

336 new radio station(s) has (have) been found

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Start automatic search. - 3

The number of found radio stations is displayed.

OK Proceed.

Structure radio station list

FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD:

STRUCTURE OF RADIO STATION LIST

The radio stations found in the automatic search were divided into appropriate station blocks according to the previously selected antenna cables

(signal sources). The stations can only be reorganised later within these blocks.

The block with the stations of your favoured signal source is at the top of the

station list

Signal source(s)

ASTRA1 19.2°E

DVB-C

DVB-T

Antennaicable

s) Associated station numbers

1-300

301-500

501-700

701-900

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Start automatic search. - 4

The structure of the radio station list is displayed.

OK Proceed

Age-related lock

INITIAL INSTALLATION Age-related lock n o yes recorded Back

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Start automatic search. - 6

◀ ▶ SelectAge-related lock.

You can specify an age limit for your TV set here. DVB broadcasts which have an appropriate age identification are locked and can only be watched after entering the access code (see page 56).

OK Proceed.

Initial installation

Time and date

INITIAL INSTALLATION Time and date Time 09:19:14 Date 26.02.2010 Proceed Back

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Initial installation - 2

▲▼ Select time / date.

If no values or no correct values have been entered for the data and time, enter the correct values with the numeric buttons here.

OK Proceed.

Sound playback via ...

SOUND COMPONENTS Sound playback via ... TV speakers Speaker system HIF/AV amplifier Sound projector HIF/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable) Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable) Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Initial installation - 4

▲▼ Select sound components.

This selection indicates which sound components you want to use to hear your TV sound. Depending on the selection, the sound component wizard starts with which you can make further settings.

The sound component wizard is described from page 115 and can also be started at any time outside of first time operation (TV menu under Connections → Sound components).

OK Proceed.

Network configuration

INITIAL INSTALLATION Network configuration Perform no*W* Do not perform or perform Proceed Jack

◀ ▶ Select the option.

With the selection, specify whether you want to configure the available network adapter now. For Perform now see Media menu from page 62 onwards. For Do not perform or perform later:

OK End of wizard.

Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna

If you are receiving one or more DVB-T stations with picture and sound interference then you should change the installation location and alignment of the antenna. Ask your dealer to tell you which channels are used to broadcast the DVB-T stations in your region.

In normal TV mode, without other displays. A DVB-T station is received and selected.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna - 1

MENU: Call TV menu.

SelectSettings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ SelectStations,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ SelectManual adjustment, OK call manual adjustment.

SIGNAL SOURCE Select the area in which you want the broadcaster to search here. You can use the button to automatically select station by station. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT Signal source DVB-T Channel E05 Frequency 177.50 MHz Bandwidth 7 MHz N a m e C / N L e v e l B E R Store Search

The signal source is already on DVB-T due to the station preselection.

Position and align the antenna in such a manner that maximum values for C/N and Level are obtained.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna - 3

Blue button: Start search.

Search for DVB-T stations one after another and compare values for C/N and Level.

Then position/align the antenna to the weakest station so that maximum values for C/N and Level are obtained. The value for BER should be as low as possible.

Thereafter perform an automatic search for all DVB-T stations (see page 42).

Daily operation

Select station

Select station with P+ / P-

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with P+ / P- - 1

P+/P- Station up/down

The status display with station title, progress bar, time and sound identification signal is shown briefly (see page 40).

If Favourites are selected, you can change to the corresponding station in the Favorites list using P+/P− (see page 31).
The symbols for the sound identification are described on page 40.
If there are additional languages or DVB subtitles for DVB stations, then language and subtitle selection is shown below the station display.

See also page 41: Selection possibilities for DVB stations.

Select station using the numeric buttons

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station using the numeric buttons - 1
long

1-digit stations

Keep the numeric button pressed for one second, the station changes immediately.

or:

Press the numeric button briefly, the station changes after 2 seconds (changes immediately in case up to 9 stations are stored).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - 1-digit stations - 1
short short long

2-digit and 3-digit stations

Press first (and second) numeric button briefly.

Keep the last numeric button pressed for one second, the station changes immediately.

or:

Press all the numeric buttons briefly, the station changes after 2 seconds (changes immediately in case of up to 99 or 999 stored stations).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - 2-digit and 3-digit stations - 1
all short

4-digit stations

Press all four numeric buttons, the station changes immediately.

If Favorites are selected, you can change to the corresponding station in the Favorites list using the numeric keys (see page 31). Maximum two-digit station numbers are possible.
If you select an unoccupied station slot, the next available station is switched to.

Select station with the station list

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with the station list - 1

In normal TV operation, without further displays, no favourites selected:

OK Call Station list.
LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with the station list - 2

Sorting numerically
STATION LIST HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV 0 VIDEO 1 Das Erste C 2 ZDF C 3 WDR Köln C 4 Bayerisches FS C 5 hr-fernsehen C 6 Phoenix C 7 BR-alpha C 8 3sat C 9 EinsExtra C 10 EinsFestival C 11 EinsPlus C 12 ZDFinfokanal C 13 ZDFdokukanal C 14 ZDFtheaterkan C 15 arte C 16 Kka C 21:00-21:45 Urlaubsparadies - Toskana Switch to... Select station Favorites Scan stations Change stations Sort alphabetically

P+/P- Scroll in the pages of the station list.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with the station list - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with the station list - 5

◀◀ Jump to the next station block.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with the station list - 6

▲▼◄► Mark stations.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with the station list - 7

or:

Input the channel number.

The marked station is shown as a small picture .

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with the station list - 8

OK The marked station is called.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with the station list - 9
Blue button: Changes the sorting between numerically and alphabetically.

Sorting alphabetically
STATION LIST 3sat 9Live arte ARD AVS Bayrisches FS BR alpha BR CNN INT 21:00:21:45 Urlaubsparadies - Toskana Das Erste DSF DVD-REC D Vierte EinsExtra EinsFestival EinsPlus Eurosport HDMI1 HDMI2 Switch to Select station Favorites PIP when Change ications Sort meaningfully

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with the station list - 11

Input the first letter (see also page 12).

The first station for the specified letters is marked.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station with the station list - 12

▲▼◄► Mark stations.

OK The marked station is called..

Daily operation

Select station via favourites list

You can save and call your favourite stations in 6 favourites lists (e.g. for multiple users). Each favourites list can contain up to 99 stations. After initial installation, 10 stations from the station list are already stored in the first list. Change the favourites list to suit your requirements (see Put together / change favourites lists on page 45).

In normal TV mode, without other displays:

OK calls the station list.

OK calls the station list. Red button: Calls the favourites list. FAVOURITES FavouriteList 1 1 Das Erste 2 Z D F 3 WDR Köln 4 Bayrisches FS 5 hr-femsehen 6 Phoenix 7 BR alpha 8 3sat 9 Ein-Plus 10 EinsExtra 11 MTV 1 2 V I V A Switch to... P+/P- Scroll in the pages of the favourites list. Select station directly with numeric buttons. Or: ▲ ▼ Markstations. ◀ ▶ Select other favourites list. OK The marked station is called. ■ Other favourites lists can only be selected if these contain stations.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select station via favourites list - 2

Red button: Back to the station list.

Green button: Scan all stations of the currently selected favourites list.

Yellow button: Change the Favourites lists, see page 45.

Explanation of the favourites lists:

The selection made with the red button (favourites list) is retained until you switch back to the station list with the red button.

If favourites are selected, the name of the favourites list appears in the status display after the station name after changing stations.

Explanation of the icons following station names:

T DVB-T station (digital terrestrial via antenna)
C DVB-C station (digital via cable)
S DVB-S station (digital via satellite)
Coded station
CI Plus coded station

Locked station (see Parental lock on page 56)

Selecting Audio/Video Source

Select the AV source via the AV selection

→ In normal TV mode, without other displays:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select the AV source via the AV selection - 1

Call AV selection
AV SELECTION HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV VIDEO Switch to ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select the AV source via the AV selection - 3

▲▼ Select desired connection, OK switch over.

If the selected AV source provides a signal (picture), it should be visible now.

For the VIDEO selection the set switches to programme place 0 (signal source antenna/cable (analogue), factory setting channel E36). The TV set shows the signal of a provider via antenna (see page 111). The channel can be changed as required (see page 43).

Select the AV source via station list

In normal TV mode, without other displays:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select the AV source via station list - 1

OK Call the station list.

If the favourites list is displayed, switch to the station list first.

The connections are always at the beginning of the list in numerical sorting.

The connections are sorted into the list in alphabetical order in alphabetic sorting.

STATION LIST HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV 0 VIDEO 1 Das Erste 2 ZDF 3 WDR Köln 4 Baycritesches FS 5 hr-femsehen 6 Phoenix 7 BR-alpha 8 3sat 9 EinsExtra 10 EinsFestival 11 EinsPlus 12 ZOFinfokanal 13 ZOFlokukanal 14 ZOFtheaterkan 15 arte 16 Kika 21:00-21:45 Urlaubsparadies - Toskana Switch to... Select. station Favorites PIP scan Change sessions Sort alphabetically

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select the AV source via station list - 3

▲▼◄► Select connection.

OK Switch over.

Daily operation

Adjusting the sound

Switchingsoundoff/on

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switchingsoundoff/on - 1

Sound off.

Sound on: Press the button again or increase the volume using V+.

Settingthevolume

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Settingthevolume - 1

V+/V- Volume louder / quieter.

The volume bar will be shown briefly if no other menu is displayed.

Setting the Sound mode

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting the Sound mode - 1

Call Sound mode.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting the Sound mode - 2

◀ ▶ Select the number of speakers you want to hear.

Additional sound settings

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Additional sound settings - 1

As long as you can still see the volume bar or the selection of speakers for sound mode:

▲ Call additional sound settings

Volume Sound mode Dolby PLL mode Sound adjustment 24

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Additional sound settings - 3

◀ ▶ Select sound setting (right column),
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Makechanges.

Sound settings via the TV menu

In normal TV mode, without other displays.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Sound settings via the TV menu - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 1

◀ ▶ Select Sound,

▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Select desired sound setting (right column),
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Makechanges.

Explanations of the sound settings:

Sound mode Select the number of speakers you want to hear. The selection depends on the connected sound components (from page 115) and on the transmitted audio signal.

If the number of speakers appears in brackets, the sound of missing speakers is transmitted by the existing speakers (virtual).

optimal The momentarily reproduced audio signal is output with the ideal number of speakers.

1 Play centre sound or mono (left/right).
2 Play front sound (L/R stereo).
3 Play front and centre sound.
4 Play front and surround sound.
5 Play front, surround and centre sound.

Amplifier ▶ Play via an external HiFi amplifier. Selection is only possible if an amplifier has been selected in the sound components wizard (see page 120).

Dolby PLII Here you can make Dolby Pro Logic II sound settings for mode movie and music. Menu item only appears with certain sound mode settings.

Sound Speech, Classical, Pop, Custom music, and Custom film adjustment sound.

Audio Set the volume of the audio commentary to be relative to commentary the volume of the programme being transmitted. Should negative values result (those in the area of -50... -1), the

audio commentary is quieter than the programme sound. Should positive values result (those in the area of +1... +50), the audio commentary is louder than the programme sound. If the value 0 results, then the audio commentary is at the exactly the same volume as the programme sound.

The menu item only appears if audio commentary is activated (see page 41) and is offered by the current station. Additionally, the Loudspeaker sound or Headphone sound must be set to normal + audio commentary must be switched on (see next page).

Headphone volume Adjust the headphones volume.

Loudness Proper boost of bass and treble tones at low volume.

Sound-picture If the sound does not exactly match the picture, you synchronisation can correct it here. If you move to the left in the bar you delay the sound in relation to the picture. If you move to the right you accelerate it in relation to the picture. The sound is adapted in time steps of 10ms each.

The Sound-picture synchronisation menu item only appears for DVB stations.

more ... Call with OK (see next page).

Daily operation

Explanations of the sound settings:

more ...

Loudspeaker/ For analogue stations: In the case of programmes with Headphone twin sound, you can select separately between Mono/ Stereo or Sound 1 or Sound 2 for the loudspeakers and the headphones.

For DVB channels: You can choose here if you wish to listen to a special soundtrack for the visually impaired over the speakers. This soundtrack uses an audio commentary to describe the action taking place on-screen. The menu item only appears if an audio commentary is offered by the current channel.

Auto Volume Reduces volume differences, e.g. for advertisements that are too loud.

AV output You can indicate here which sound is output via the AV signal socket for dual sound programmes: Sound 1 (e.g. main language), sound 2 (e.g. foreign language), or sound 1+2 (both simultaneously).

Maximum volume Determining the maximum volume that can be set.

max. switch on volume Specify the volume that is set when switching on the TV set with the mains switch. If the volume is higher when switching the TV set to the standby mode than specified here, then it is reduced automatically to the fixed maximum switching on volume when it is turned on again.

Volume adjustment for current station The volume can differ according to the individual stations. If the sound is too loud or too quiet in relation to other stations, adjust the volume. When the menu is open, you can select the stations one after another with P+/P− and adjust every single station conveniently.

Balance Set stereo balance so that the volume impression is identical on the left and right.

Auto speech If the automatic speech detection is activated, the sound detection of the current programme is automatically output with optimum comprehensibility when speech is detected.

Daily operation

Adjusting the picture

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Adjusting the picture - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Adjusting the picture - 2

◀ ▶ Select Picture,
▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Picture 3D Picture adjustment Personal settings (TV digital) Contrast Colour Intensity Colour

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu - 2

◀ ▶ Select the desired picture function,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Makechanges.

Explanations of the picture settings:

3D Select the settings for your TV set's 3D display (see page 36).

Picture You can switch between three fixed picture setting variations and the three personal picture values that you have set here (see page 35).

Contrast The contrast setting depends on the brightness of the room. The brighter the surroundings the higher the contrast should be set. The power consumption of the TV set is directly dependent on the value set here (see also page 22).

Colour intensity Set the colour intensity to suit your personal taste. The colours should appear natural.

Colour Here, you can give the TV picture a warmer or colder hue temperature according to your personal taste.

Brightness Set the brightness so that the black areas of the picture only just appear black.

Sharpness Here you can adjust picture sharpness to obtain the best definition.

Digital Noise With active DNC (Digital Noise Control) you can eliminate Control (DNC) or reduce picture noise.

more ... Call with OK (see right hand column).

Explanations of the picture settings (continuation):

Image+ Active Picture improvement on/off and demo mode for Image+ Active.

Auto dimming If this auto dimming is active then the television picture - Room contrast is automatically reduced when the room brightness diminishes (Optical Power Control – OPC). This will also reduce the power consumption of the TV.

→ Owing to a reduction in the luminance in 3D mode for technical reasons, this function is deactivated when showing 3D content.

Auto dimming - Video (VBD+) If this automatic dimming ("Video compensating Backlight Dimming") is active then, dependant on the current video content, the background lighting is reduced and concurrently the video signal is enhanced resulting in improved contrast to your television picture. This will also reduce the power consumption of the TV.

Film quality DMM reduces jolt in rapid picture object movements and impr. (DMM) rolling text displays. This applies especially for movies.

Auto format Automatic detection and setting of the picture format for Cinemascope or widescreen movies.

Picture format Set picture format (see page 35).

Move picture up/down Move picture vertically (see page 35).

Daily operation

Selecting the picture format

The picture format cannot be altered if an HbbTV application ^1 is active (see page 80) or if the TV set is in 3D mode (see page 37).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Selecting the picture format - 1

Press the Picture format button until the desired picture format is set or press

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Selecting the picture format - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Selecting the picture format - 3

◀ ▶ to select the desired picture format.

The Panorama picture format can be set between proportionally correct and format filling display. Black bars are visible on the left and right of the picture in the proportionally correct display.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Selecting the picture format - 4

Switch: Keep the M button on the TV pressed, at the same time, press the Picture format button on the remote control briefly.

Reset: Press the same button combination again.

Explanations of the picture formats:

The setting options depend on the transmitted picture content.

16:9 Proportionally correct display of 16:9 broadcasts.

4:3 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts.

Panorama Proportionally correct or format filling display (as-delivered state) of 4:3 broadcasts on the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles remain visible.

See above for switching the Panorama mode.

Zoom Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture magnification.

PALplus Is a 4:3-compatible 16:9 picture broadcast supplied by the station which is detected automatically.

If a high resolution video signal is displayed on the TV set or fed in via the interfaces PC IN, HDMI1, HDMI2 or HDMI3, the picture formats 16:9 PC, 16:9 TV, 16:9 Zoom, 4:3 PC, 4:3 TV and 4:3 Zoom can be set.

In the PC formats, the complete picture content will be shown. In the TV formats a small part of the picture is cropped. This may be necessary to hide possible interference at the edge of the picture, which arises from the signal supplied.

Movepicturevertically

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Movepicturevertically - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Movepicturevertically - 2

In normal TV mode without other displays.

▲▼ Move picture up/down.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Movepicturevertically - 3

To show subtitles or news tickers which have been cut off, the picture can be moved up or down in the picture formats Panorama and Zoom (not with high resolution signal) with the arrow buttons ▲▼.

Presettings / Personal settings for picture adjustment

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Presettings / Personal settings for picture adjustment - 1

MENU: Call TV menu.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Presettings / Personal settings for picture adjustment - 2

▶ Select Picture,
▼ go to the menu line below.
▶ SelectPicture adjustment,
▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Picture Picture adjustment Presettings (TV digital) Personal settings (TV dig tal) Eco standard

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Presettings / Personal settings for picture adjustment - 4

▶ Select Presettings or Personal settings.
For presettings, go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Select the desired presetting for the picture.
OK Confirm selection.

Explanations for Picture adjustment:

If you select Presettings, the picture settings for the signal input group currently active are set to predefined values. See Glossary for an explanation: Signal input groups.

Your own settings for contrast, colour intensity, colour temperature, brightness, sharpness and digital noise suppression are saved in the personal values. At the same time, you have your own personal values for each signal input group.

All picture and sound adjustments can be reset to the default values in one step for all signal input groups in the index of the TV set under Reset picture/sound or Factory settings picture/sound.

Daily operation

3D function

You can use the 3D functionality of your TV set to display 3D material transmitted by a channel or from an external player that is connected.

You require a pair of Loewe Active 3D Glasses to be able to use the 3D functionality in its entirety (see Accessories on page 138). Please read the operating instructions included with the 3D glasses.

3D settings

Using the 3D settings you can select the correct display format, should this not have been detected automatically. What's more, you can choose to view 3D material in 2D or "traditional" 2D material in 3D.

For 3D content that is being played back from an external HDMI player, the 3D display format is normally recognised correctly when the factory setting 3D mode → automatic is selected. You may need to set the 3D mode manually to view 3D content from broadcasters.

Owing to a reduction in the luminance in 3D mode for technical reasons, the Auto dimming - Room (see page 34) is deactivated when showing 3D content.
If the TV set is operated with the remote control during a 3D playback, flicker effects can occur in the 3D glasses during this.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - 3D settings - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 1

◀ ▶ SelectPicture,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Select3D,
▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Picture 3D 0 >3D 3D mode 3D >7D off ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 3

◀ ▶ Select the desired function,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Set the changes.

Explanations of the 3D settings:

2D->3D

on/off If you set 2D->3D to on, all 2D image material will be displayed in 3D. You will need to wear the 3D glasses to view it properly.

The 2D->3D conversion is not available for the Connect 32 3D.

3D mode

off Here you can deactivate the 3D mode of the TV set. The TV set shows the 2D/3D image material in the same way as it is provided by the station or external player.

automatic If the TV is set to this setting (factory setting), then the TV set automatically switches over to the correct 3D mode, if this is possible. Only change the setting if the 3D content is not displayed correctly.

side by side To display 3D content in side by side format. When viewing 3D content with this setting, two almost identical images are displayed next to each other and put together correctly by the TV set.

The 3D mode is automatically reset the next time you switch on the TV set.

top/bottom To display 3D content in top/bottom format. When viewing 3D content with this option, two almost identical images are displayed one above the other and put together correctly by the TV set.

The 3D mode is automatically reset the next time you switch on the TV set.

Games To display 3D content in full picture format. When viewing 3D content with this option, two almost identical images are displayed as full pictures and put together correctly by the TV set.

The 3D mode is automatically reset the next time you switch on the TV set.

3D->2D

on/off If you set 3D->2D to on, the 3D material from both TV stations and from external players will be changed into 2D and played back. The three dimensional (3D) effect will disappear. You will not need to wear the 3D glasses to view it properly.

Daily operation

Picture format / 3D mode

If 3D contents are recognised by the TV device, the picture format cannot be subsequently changed. The picture format when in 3D operation is always 16:9 PC.

The 3D mode can be changed using the Picture Format button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Picture format / 3D mode - 1

Select the 3D mode.

Refer to page 36 for further explanations.

Instruction / Symbol

If 3D content is detected by the TV set, a corresponding message appears if Automatic info → yes is selected in the menu (TV menu → Settings→ Miscellaneous → On-screen displays → Automatic info).

HINT The following images will be displayed in 2D mode. For this part, put the 3D glasses on and then switch them on. Viewing 3D images for extended periods of time can tire out the eyes and/or cause feelings of dizziness.

If Automatic info → no is set, a symbol appears instead of the text instruction. The instruction and the symbol will disappear after the display time has elapsed (see also page 58).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Instruction / Symbol - 2

natural_image Close-up of a dragonfly perched on a tree bark, with green foliage in the background (no text or symbols visible)

The symbol can also be seen in the status display.

1 Das Erste 14:30-15:15 Toscana Languagebound Subtile 14:42 Alarm time 20:00 Sleep timer 23:00

Daily operation

Button functions

Every operating mode of the TV set (TV, Radio, MediaPortal, Teletext, EPG, PIP, and DR archive/Video archive ^(1) ) has its own menu and own functions for the coloured buttons.

The function of the coloured buttons is shown at the bottom of the menus and wizards. Below, some of the function are listed which you need in TV mode for the daily handling of your TV set.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Button functions - 1

Coloured buttons in TV mode

In normal TV mode, without other displays.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Coloured buttons in TV mode - 1

Red button: Freeze on/off.

If an interactive data service is available (e.g. HbbTV see page 80 or MHEG-5 see page 52), the red button will load or start the corresponding application.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Coloured buttons in TV mode - 2

Green button: Open the Teletext functions menu ^2 .

You can select Subtitles and your Personal text pages via the Teletext functions menu. The operation of subtitles depends on the station selected.

Subtitles Subtitles analogue stations:

TELETEXT FUNCTIONS Subties Personal text pages

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Subtitles Subtitles analogue stations: - 2

◀ ▶ SelectSubtitles,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Select the size of the teletext subtitles, OK show teletext subtitles (display only if subtitles are available).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Subtitles Subtitles analogue stations: - 3

END: Teletext subtitles off or select off in menu.

Subtitles DVB stations:

If the DVB station does not provide any subtitles, the menu item Subtitles is greyed out and cannot be accessed with OK.
The DVB subtitles can also be selected via the status display (see page 41).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Subtitles DVB stations: - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Subtitles DVB stations: - 2

◀ ▶ SelectSubtitles, OK call.
▲▼ Select subtitle mode, OK show/hide subtitles.

^1 Only for TV sets that contain an integrated hard disc (DR+), a connected external hard disc (USB recording) or that have an archive available on the network (DR streaming).
^2 If the audio commentary is active, this button will have other functions, see page 41.

Coloured buttons in TV mode (continuation)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Coloured buttons in TV mode (continuation) - 1

Green button: Open the Teletext functions menu

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Coloured buttons in TV mode (continuation) - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Coloured buttons in TV mode (continuation) - 3

▶ SelectPersonal text pages,

OK call.

Personal text pages

PERSONAL TEXT PAGES a r l e 1 1 2 N e w s Z D F 2 0 0 S p o r t A R D 1 7 0 W e t t e r ---- ---- ---- ---- View

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Coloured buttons in TV mode (continuation) - 5

▲▼ Select text page, OK view.
If only one text page is defined, no list will be shown and the Teletext page will be opened immediately. To define your personal text pages, see page 51.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Coloured buttons in TV mode (continuation) - 6

Yellow button: Go to the last viewed station.

Use this button to quickly switch back and forth between two stations.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Coloured buttons in TV mode (continuation) - 7

Blue button: Show programme info.

The programme info of the following programme is displayed additionally for DVB stations.

1 A R D 14:30-15:15 — Urlaubsparadies Toskana Urlaubsparadies Toskana 15:15-15:45 Reiseziele dieser Erde Ägypten PROGRAMME INFO 14:43 Detailed Info (EPG) ••• Detailed Info (Teletext) Programme preview (L)

Explanation of the symbols in the programme information:

Programme in 16:9 picture format
Programme in high picture definition (HDTV)
Programme with Dolby-Digital sound
Broadcast of subtitles for the deaf and hard of hearing
Programme with youth protection (see Parental lock - Age-related lock on page 56).

The symbols may also appear in combinations.

Daily operation

Permanent display of time

C

Press twice in rapid succession: Time is shown/hidden permanently.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Permanent display of time - 1

natural_image Exterior view of a historic stone building with arched windows, surrounded by trees and shrubs under a clear blue sky (no signage or text visible)

The permanent display of the time can also be set in the TV menu under Settings → Miscellaneous → On-screen displays → Permanent clock display (see page 58).

The display position of the time depends on the selected setting in the On-screen displays menu (ex-factory: bottom). See page 58 for how to change the display position.

Operation without remote control

Changing the station on the TV set

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changing the station on the TV set - 1

+1 - Station up/down.

Switching radio on or off or switching to radio

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching radio on or off or switching to radio - 1

R Radio on or switch between TV and Radio.

Calling the TV menu on the set

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Calling the TV menu on the set - 1

M Call Direct control on TV set menu,

DIRECT CONTROL ON TV SET Operating mode AV selection Volume Brightness Con TV ... Key N: Keys /- : **

- / + select function.

M or R Go to the menu line below,

- I + make changes.

M Move up one menu line,

- / + select other function.

Explanations of the settings:

Operating Switch between TV and radio operation. mode

AV selection Select AV interface.

Volume Set volume.

Brightness Set brightness.

Contrast Set contrast.

The power consumption of the TV set depends directly on the value set here (see also page 22).

Picture format Set picture format (see also page 35).

Station Select station +/-

Service The Service menu item is provided for service purposes by dealers only.

Daily operation

Status display

INFO

In normal TV mode, without other displays. INFO: Show status display.

1 Das Erste 14:30-15:15 Toshana HobTV 00 Digital (5) Largusgebound Subtilo 14:42 Alarm time 20:00 Sleep timer 23:00

In the upper two lines, you will see the number and name of the station, the title and transmission time of the programme currently showing (if available) and the sound identification signal.

The bar (if available) indicates the progress of the current programme.

If information about the current programme is available, this can be called by pressing the INFO button again; in this case the button on the right is displayed.

A menu (see page 41), the time and, if activated, the alarm time and switch-off time appear at the bottom of the screen depending on the DVB station.

The status bar is also shown automatically every time you change channels.

The status bar is hidden automatically at the end of the display time (see page 58 for setting).

If you want to hide the status bar manually before the display time ends, you can only do this with the END button.

Explanations of the symbols in the status display:

General symbols:

3D Display in 3D mode (use Loewe Active 3D Glasses, see accessories on page 138).

HbbTV mode is on and HbbTV applications are available

Transmitted audio signal:

Mono Mono audio transmission analogue

2-sound Two-sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2) analogue

1+1 Two-sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2) digital

Stereo Stereo sound transmission analogue

Stereo (AAC+) Stereo sound transmission (HEAAC)

① Stereo sound transmission digital (PCM)

Digital Dolby Digital sound transmission (DD)

Digital+ Dolby Digital+ sound transmission (DD+)

Digital (AAC+) Dolby Digital AAC+ sound transmission (HEAAC)

dts dts sound transmission

MPEG MPEG sound transmission

PLII Dolby Pro Logic II sound transmission

☐☐ VS Ref Dolby Virtual Speaker Reference display

☐☐ VS Wide Dolby Virtual Speaker Wide display

Transmitted audio channels:

DD / dts 1.0 / mono

DD/dts/MPEG 2.0

DD / dts 3.0

DD / dts 4.0

DD / dts 5.0

DD / dts 2.1

DD / dts 3.1

DD / dts 4.1

DD / dts 5.1

Selected listening mode:

1 Play centre sound or mono (left/right).

2 Play front sound (L/R stereo).

3 Play front and centre sound.

4 Play front and surround sound.

5 Play front, surround and centre sound.

If the number of speakers appears in brackets, the sound of missing speakers is transmitted by the existing speakers (virtual). The Dolby Virtual speaker (VS mode) developed by Dolby is activated for the virtual sound reproduction.

Daily operation

Selection possibilities for DVB stations

In the status display additional selection possibilities can be offered for specific programmes depending on the DVB programme provider.

If during the status display you press one of the coloured buttons or the TEXT button then the associated selection menu will be displayed.
The selection line is also displayed automatically when a new broadcast with different options to the previous broadcast begins or when you switch stations.

The selection menus are only available as long as the status display is shown. However you can call them again by pressing the INFO button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Selection possibilities for DVB stations - 1

Red button: Channel selection for multi-channel providers

Other setting options for DVB stations

You can make general presettings for DVB stations under TV menu → Settings → Miscellaneous → DVB settings.

Subtitle mode Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to be displayed as soon as it is offered by the station. A special subtitle for impaired hearing can also be selected. Subtitles are not offered by all stations. Many stations only broadcast subtitles by teletext.

Audio You can activate a special sound for viewers with impaired commentary vision here (see below).

DVB character set Select the DVB character set so that the title of the broadcast of your favourite received station or the texts of your CA module are displayed correctly.

Green button: Language/sound

The sound formats on offer and designations depend on the programme being broadcast.

Yellow button: Time selection

Blue button: CA module selection

The CA module selection only appears when two CA module are plugged in, which are both able to descramble the encrypted station.

Further explanations of the audio commentary

You can set the system here to always play an additional special soundtrack for the visually impaired whenever one is available. This soundtrack uses an audio commentary to describe the action taking place on-screen. The function can be activated and deactivated in the TV menu (see above) the first time that it is used (see page 23), or by holding down the green button for a few seconds.

see chapter Adjusting the sound on pages 32 and 33 for more information on how to configure the audio commentary.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Further explanations of the audio commentary - 1

TEXT: Subtitles

The subtitles available depend on programme being broadcast

Audio commentary status prompt

Audio commentary is activated (see above).

A quick press of the green button will tell you if audio commentary is available.

If audio commentary is available:

You will see a corresponding message on the screen. You will also hear a beep lasting approximately 1.5 seconds.

If audio commentary is not available:

You will see a corresponding message on the screen. You will also hear three short beeps.

Managing stations

TV stations

Various options for managing stations are available via the TV menu. For example the description for TV stations. For radio stations the same applies, except that the Radio menu is called in Radio mode (see also page 52).

Station management is not possible if a programmed timer recording is still pending.
If at least one station is locked the access code must be entered before Search/Update (see Parental lock on page 56).

Search/update stations – Search wizard

In the search/update with the search wizard, new stations are searched for which have not yet been stored.

You have to repeat the initial installation (see page 22) and automatically search for new ones if you want to delete all the existing stations and automatically search for new ones.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Search/update stations – Search wizard - 1

▶ Select Settings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Select Stations,
▼ go to the menu line below.
▶ Select Search wizard,
▼ go to the menu line below.

In the upper info text the current search settings will now be displayed:

SEARCH WIZARD Your TV carries out the update of the station list (search for new stations; delete stations no longer broadcast) with the following settings: Location of TV set United Kingdom Signal source DVB-C TV MENU Settings Station Search wizard Change search settings Start search/update

If you want to change these search settings:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 2

▶ Select Change search settings,
OK wizard prompts search settings.

If you agree with these settings:

▶ Select Start search/update,
OK start search.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 3

Red button: Abort current search/update.

Explanations of some search settings:

Set location Select the country for country-specific defaults and station sorting.

Signal source Select antenna/cable (analogue), DVB-T, DVB-C or DVB-S ^(1) here depending on which signal source you want to search for new stations. A configuration of DVB-T and DVB-S ^(1) antennas can also be called by the green button (see also page 23 and 24).

Calling up the DVB antenna configuration causes the Change search settings dialogue to be quit. You must call up the dialogue again after finishing the configuration.

Antenna/cable: With selection of set location the conventional TV TV/colour standard/colour standard is the default. This should only standard be changed if stations with other standards are to be searched.

Encrypted stations You can state whether coded stations are to be searched for in the search/update. Select yes then coded stations are also searched for. However, these stations can only be received in connection with a CA module and the appropriate Smart Card. Ask your dealer which Smart Card you need to receive certain stations. Handling of the CA module is described on page 59.

DVB-T If you want to run the station search independently of Search method the channel grid, select frequency search for the search method.

DVB-C With the selection of set location the conventional settings will be preset. Only change this if you know other symbol rates and modulation types or if you have to specify the network ID for your cable network (information available from your cable network provider). If you want to run the station search independently of the channel grid, select frequency search for the search method.

DVB-S If you want to run the station search independently of Settings the channel grid, select frequency search for the search method.

The symbol rate is specified by the satellite provider and normally does not need to be adjusted.

"Equipment and upgrade options, see page 140.

Managing stations

Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer found stations

The number of new stations found is displayed after the automatic search/update has been completed.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer found stations - 1

OK List of new stations found
SEARCH WIZARD All stations marked with a ✓ are saved. Note: The newly found stations which you have already deleted are not marked. SEARCH FOR/UPDATE STATION Newly found stations WDR-Köln ✓ EinsFestival ✓ MDR S-ANHALT ✓ Test-R ✓ ARD-Online-Kana ✓ ARD-TEST-2 ✓ ARD-TEST-1 ✓ MDR THURINGEN ✓ Kika ✓ Proceed Mark/Uama Page 40 Mark/Ianmark all

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer found stations - 3
▲▼◄► Select station.

Yellow button: Mark / unmark station

Blue button: Mark / unmark all

OK saves the selected stations.

Afterwards, a list of the stations which are saved but which are temporarily not broadcasting or no longer exist is displayed, if available.

The number of the memory location used is displayed in front of the station. Please select the stations you really want to delete.

SEARCH WIZARD The following stored stations were no longer found because they are not currently broadcasting a programme or no longer exist. Please mark those you want to delete completely. Those not marked are retained. SEARCH FOR/UPDATE STATION Stations no longer found 112 S36 C ✓ 127 Test-R C ✓ 134 TVOTEXT C ✓ 142 ARD-Online... C © Fr oead Mark / u n m a ! Page it Mark / u n m a k all

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer found stations - 5
▲▼◄► Select station.

Yellow button: Mark / unmark station

Blue button: Mark / unmark all

OK deletes the selected station.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer found stations - 6

END: Exit the search wizard.

Search/update station – manual search / settings

If you want to adapt the parameters of an existing station, first select the appropriate station.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Search/update station – manual search / settings - 1

◀ ▶ Select Settings,

▼ go to the menu line below.

◀ ▶ Select Stations,

▼ go to the menu line below.

◀ ▶ Select Manual adjustment,

OK call input box.

You can enter or edit the station data in the following lines:

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT Signal source Cable [analogue] Channel 521 Frequency 303.25 MHz Name K i K a TV standard BIG Col. standard Automatic Store Search

Or:

Blue button: Starts Search and searches for next station.

Red button: Stores station.

→ Only stations for the selected signal source can be saved which do not yet exist in the station list.
→ Stations which already exist in the station list for the selected signal source are displayed with their station numbers and names on a grey background. These stations can only be overwritten with the red button.

Explanations of some search settings:

Various settings are possible depending on the selected signal source. Some settings have already been explained in the initial installation (see page 22 onwards).

Signal source Selection of range in which you want to search for the station.

Channel Direct input of channel.

Frequency Direct input of station frequency.

TV stand. Input of station TV standard.

Ask your dealer in this regard.

Col. standard Input of the station colour standard.

Ask your dealer in this regard.

Managing stations

Change, delete, move, rename, restore station

Change station can also be called via the station list (page 30).
If at least one station is locked the access code must be entered before changing stations start-up (see Parental lock on page 56).
In some TV broadcasting networks (e.g. FreeView) you are not allowed to move or rename stations. Use Favourites instead.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change, delete, move, rename, restore station - 1

Call TV menu.

◀ ▶ Select Settings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Select Stations,
▼ go to the menu line below.
▶ Select Change stations,
OK call list of stations.

CHANGE STATIONS 1 ARD 13 WDR 3 2 ZDF 14 BR 3 SAT3 15 HR 4 D:\V/RTC 36 MDR 3 5 RTL 17 KIKA 6 VOX 18 PHOENIX 7 S-RTL 19 BR-ALPHA 8 N-TV 20 3SAT 9 DSF 21 KABEL 1 10 EinsPlus 100 Das Erste C 11 9Live 101 ZDF C 12 RTL2 102 WDR Köln C 21:00 - 21:45 Urlaubsparacles · Toskana Page 1 Select station Rasspore stations Delete Move Edit Add

In this menu you can delete, move, rename or restore stations.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call TV menu. - 2

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ or numeric buttons:

Select the appropriate station.

Scroll with P+/P- if necessary.

Deletestation

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deletestation - 1

Red button: Starts Delete station.

▲▼ Select several stations to be deleted if necessary,
OK to execute the delete.

Move station / Change order

→ Stations can only be resorted within the signal source block.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Move station / Change order - 1

Yellow button: Starts Move station.

▲▼ Mark several stations if needed,
OK selection ended,
▲▼ Select insertion position from which the selected stations are to be inserted,
OK to execute the move.

Rename station

→ DVB stations for which the station name is also broadcast cannot be renamed. In this case, the Rename function is hidden.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Rename station - 1

Blue button: Starts Rename station.

Under the 1st letter of the name you will see a line indicating the current input position.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Rename station - 2

▶ Input position one character to the right (also for blanks).
Input position one character to the left.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Rename station - 3

Input the letters one after another. When using the remote control, press the numeric buttons just as on a telephone keypad until the desired symbol is displayed. The available letters are printed respectively on the buttons. See page 129 for a detailed overview of the available characters.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Rename station - 4

Green button: Switch upper/lower case letters.

Yellow button: Deletes the character before the input position.

Blue button: Cancel rename.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Rename station - 5

OK to save new name.

Restorestations

Stations which have been deleted from the station list can be restored.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Restorestations - 1

Green button: Starts Restore stations.

CHANGE STATIONS Restore deleted stations 3 s a t K I K A ZDF ZDFinfokanal ZDFtokukanal ZDFinfokanal Eurosport NONAME R T L Phoenix BRalpha NDR FS HH Das Erste Das Vierte RTL Television 9Live WDR Köln VOX ProSieben Super RTL n-tv DSF RTL2 KABELL

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Restorestations - 3

▲▼◄► Select station,

OK station is restored.

The restored station is sorted in according to its signal source at the end of the respective signal block.

Managing stations

Put together / change favourites lists

Each favourites list can contain up to 99 stations. You can put together the favourites lists to suit your requirements (e.g. topic lists). Other persons using this TV set can create their own favourites lists.

The favourites lists also have the advantage that the stations of different signal sources can be stored in the order you wish.

Change favourites can also be called via the favourites list (page 31).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 2

Select Settings,

▼ go to the menu line below.

◀ ▶ Select Stations,

▼ go to the menu line below.

MarkSelect/change favourites,

OK calls list of all stations and last active favourites list.

SELECT/CHANGE All stations HDM13/DVI HDM12/DVI HDM11/DVI PC IN AVS DVD-REC 0 VIDEO 1 Das Erste C 2 ZDF C 3 WDR Köln C 4 Bayerisches FS C Stations of FAV.LIST1 1 Das Erste C 2 ZDF C 3 WDR Köln C 4 Bayerisches FS C 4 Bayrisches FS C 5 hr-fernsehen C 6 Phoenix C 7 BR-alpha C 8 3sat C 9 EinsExtra C 10 EinsFestival C 11 SAT.I C 12 RTL C

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 4
Green button: Select the next favourites list.

Rename favourites list

Favourites list (right column) must be selected. If not, change the list with ▶.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Rename favourites list - 1

Blue button: Starts Rename favourites list.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Blue button: Starts Rename favourites list. - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Blue button: Starts Rename favourites list. - 2

Enter new name (same procedure as for rename station, see page 44).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Blue button: Starts Rename favourites list. - 3

OK to save new name.

Add station to favourites list

All stations (left column) must be selected. If not, change the list with ◀.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add station to favourites list - 1

P+/P− Scroll in the pages of the station list if necessary.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add station to favourites list - 2

Mark station or select station with the numeric buttons (for alphabetical station sorting enter the initial letter) which is to be transferred as a favourite to the favourites list.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add station to favourites list - 3

OK transfers the station to the favourites list. The new station is inserted at the end of the favourites list. Proceed in the same manner with additional stations.

Delete station from favourites list

→ Favourites list (right column) must be selected. If not, change the list with ▶.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete station from favourites list - 1

▲▼ Mark station to be deleted.

OK Removes the marked station from the favourites list. or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete station from favourites list - 2

Red button: Starts Clear favourite list.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete station from favourites list - 3

OK confirms clear favourites list.

Move / change order of stations in the favourites list

→ Favourites list (right column) must be selected. If not, change the list with ▶.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Move / change order of stations in the favourites list - 1

▲▼ Mark station to be moved.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Move / change order of stations in the favourites list - 2

Yellow button: Starts Move station.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Move / change order of stations in the favourites list - 3

▲▼ Select insertion position at which the marked station is to be inserted.

The insertion position can also be selected with the numeric buttons.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Move / change order of stations in the favourites list - 4

OK to execute the move.

Picture in Picture

Picture in Picture (PIP)

The concurrent display of two different images is referred to as Picture in Picture.

Restrictions for the PIP mode:

The selection and combination options for main screen/PIP screen basically depend on the device variant (with/without DR+) and the number of receivers (tuners) of the TV set (see Equipment variants on page 140).
In the case of TV sets that are only equipped with one DVB-T/C single tuner, the PIP operation is restricted to AV-PIP (one DVB TV station and one AV source). If a satellite tuner is fitted subsequently in these devices, PIP operation is also possible from a digital satellite picture and picture via antenna/cable (analogue or DVB-T/C).
A concurrent representation of two MPEG4 coded HDTV signals is not possible.
A concurrent representation of two coded stations is not possible.
→ Simultaneous display of two analogue stations is not possible.
→ Picture change and station selection is restricted during recording.
PIP Mode is not accessible as long as an HbbTV application is active (see page 80).

The PIP operation distinguishes between two functionalities:

iPIP Only in sets with a TV picture is moved to the PIP picture when you start the iPIP mode. The station of the TV picture is now freely selectable. When you exit iPIP mode the PIP picture becomes the TV picture again and the PIP window is closed.

An orange frame around the PIP picture shows the iPIP functionality

Standard PIP Stations freely selectable and changeable for PIP and TV picture (coloured buttons have PIP-specific meaning, see right hand column).

A green frame around the PIP picture indicates that the station selection affects the PIP picture. A white frame means that the operation refers to the main picture. If the frame is blue, the station play is active in the PIP picture.

iPIP

Starting and ending iPIP mode

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Starting and ending iPIP mode - 1

On pressing the PIP button the currently displayed TV picture becomes the PIP picture. You can select other stations for the TV picture and still keep an eye on the PIP picture. You can temporarily shift commercials or programme sections to the PIP picture in this way.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Starting and ending iPIP mode - 2

The PIP picture becomes the TV picture again (PIP off).

Standard PIP

Starting and ending standard PIP mode

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Starting and ending standard PIP mode - 1

Show/hide PIP.

Select the PIP picture

The frame is green, if not, press the green button.

Select the station as usual.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select the PIP picture - 1

natural_image Scenic landscape photo of a golden field with white flowers under a blue sky with scattered clouds; includes an inset image of daisies (no text or symbols)

Select the station for the main picture

The frame is white, if not, press the green button. Select the station as usual.

Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality

The frame is green, if not, press the green button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 5

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 6

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 7

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 8

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 9

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 10

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 11

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 12

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 13

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 14

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 15

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 16

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 17

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality - 18

Yellow button: Switches contents of TV picture and PIP picture.

Blue button: Start/stop PIP scan in the PIP picture.

Picture in Picture

Configure Picture in Picture (PIP) mode

You can set different parameters for the picture in picture mode in the PIP menu.

Open the PIP menu

PIP mode started, if not, press PIP button.
In Standard PIP functionality: The frame is green, if not, press the green button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Open the PIP menu - 1

MENU: Call PIP menu.
POSITION Here, you can determine the position of the small picture, top left, bottom left, top right or bottom right. Without a screen display you can also do this with the "up", "down", "left" and "right" buttons. TV MENU Settings PIP Position Functions upper right ...

Explanations of the setting options in the PIP menu:

Note restrictions for the PIP mode (see page 46).

Position You can determine the position of the small picture here (upper left, bottom left, bottom right, upper right).

Without a screen display the position can also be changed with the menu control buttons (see right hand column).

Functions You can switch the PIP functionality between iPIP and Standard PIP (also see right hand column).

See page 46 for a more detailed explanation of the PIP functionality.

Change position of Small PIP

→ Other than the status line, which may possibly be displayed, no other display is shown on the screen:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change position of Small PIP - 1

▲▼◄►Move the PIP into a corner of the screen.

The position of the small picture can also be selected under Position in the PIP menu (see left hand column).

Switch PIP functionality (iPIP / Standard PIP)

PIP menu is opened.

TV MENU Settings PIP Functions iPIP Standard PIP

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switch PIP functionality (iPIP / Standard PIP) - 2

◀ ▶ Select Functions,
▼ go to the menu line below.
▶ Select iPIP or Standard PIP.

Electronic Programme Guide

Electronic Programme Guide – EPG

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Electronic Programme Guide – EPG - 1

EPG stands for Electronic Programme Guide and provides you with on-screen programme details. With the system, as with a printed programme guide, you can learn about the current programme. In addition programmes can be sorted according to certain topics, memorised, and also recordings can be programmed.

Starting and ending EPG

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Starting and ending EPG - 1

EPG: Switch EPG on / off.

→ EPG is only available for DVB stations.
The first time you start EPG, an assistant will guide you through the necessary presettings.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Starting and ending EPG - 2

The display of the programme guide is divided into two branches. The specifications in the upper section limit the scope of the stations displayed in the lower section.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Starting and ending EPG - 3

Blue button: Switches between the upper default lines Date, ..., Topics and the lower programme list.

Switching and memorizing with the programme list

→ You are in the lower programme list, if not, press the blue button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching and memorizing with the programme list - 1

▼ ▲ Selectstation. OK View / Memorise.

View The programme is in progress. The TV set switches to the marked programme.

Memorise The programme has not started yet and is memorised. A √ will appear in front of the station title. The TV will ask at the beginning of a programme if it should change the channel or switch on from the stand-by mode if the corresponding option of the EPG menu is activated (see page 49).

Programmes can also be noted by the timer overview (see page 123).

Adjusting the programme list

The selection is at the top of the specifications, if not, press the blue button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Adjusting the programme list - 1

▼ ▲ Select Date, Time, Stations or Topics. ◀ ▶ Select defaults within the respective line.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Adjusting the programme list - 2

Example If you are searching for the next news, select

17:00 for example for the time, all for station and News for topics. Then you get a list of all news programmes from 17.00 h onwards in the programme list below it.

The type of list of programmes in the programme list depends on the setting of the sorting in the EPG menu (page 49).

Time entry If the line Time is selected, then you can enter the time after which the programmes will be displayed, via the numeric buttons of the remote control. The broadcasts are sorted according to the order of the station list within the selected time window.

Stations If a favourites list has been selected, only the programmes of stations from the favourites list are displayed in the programme list. A single station can be selected with “...”. The Select single station window is opened. After selection, only programmes of the selected single station are displayed.

Hint Before pressing the blue button to leave the upper selection lines, select one of the preceding lines. If you then switch back to the programme list, you can change this menu line with ◀▶, without having to leave the programme list. If you have marked Time, then you can enter the time, after which the programmes will be displayed, with the numeric buttons of the remote control.

Electronic Programme Guide

Paging through the programme list

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Paging through the programme list - 1

P+/P− Page backwards / forwards.

In the entries for Date and Time, you will see changes in time as well as in date when paging. Scrolling in the programme list is also possible when the selection is at the top of the specifications.

Calling additional information about the programmes

Brief information about many programmes is displayed below the programme list of the broadcasts.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Calling additional information about the programmes - 1

You can call detailed information with the TEXT button if this function is offered by the TEXT icon in the lower left. The symbol explanations are described on page 38.

Programming a recording for a recorder

The selection is in the lower programme list, if not, press the blue button.
The displayed page of the programme list includes the desired programme, otherwise browse to it or suitably limit via the specifications in the lower section.

▼ ▲ Mark the desired programme.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a recording for a recorder - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a recording for a recorder - 2

RECORD button: Timer data is called up.

Change or confirm timer data if necessary (see page 122, "The direct way to record").

Then a red dot will be displayed in front of this programme as an identification.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a recording for a recorder - 3

RECORD button: Deletes the already programmed recording of the red marked programme from the timer. If the timer data have been transferred to an external recorder, then the timer must also be deleted there.

Configuring EPG

Start the EPG menu

→ EPG mode is started, if not, press the EPG button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Start the EPG menu - 1

EPG: Call the EPG menu.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Start the EPG menu - 2

Explanations of setting possibilities in the EPG menu:

Station In the station selection you can determine for which selection station in the programme guide information is to be displayed. Programme information is only displayed for stations with √ in the EPG list.

With the coloured buttons you can select or remove stations or only select the stations from the favourites lists. Because of the large number of receivable DVB-S ^1 stations you should restrict the station selection. This reduces the data entry time and increases the clarity in the EPG.

Marking the stations according to reception ranges:

T Digital terrestrial stations (DVB-T).
C Digital cable stations (DVB-C).
S Digital satellite stations (DVB-S) ^(1) .

Data capture Here you can switch the data entry for the electronic programme guide (EPG) on and off.

If the data entry is switched on, your TV set tries to update the database overnight (normally between 2 and 5 am) or if required two minutes after switching to stand-by mode. The TV set must be on stand-by for this and not switched off at the mains switch.

The indicator on the TV set lights orange during data entry in stand-by mode.

The data are also updated while you are watching the EPG station.

Switch on TV when marked When yes is set, the switched off TV switches on automatically from the standby mode at the beginning of a set programme. A screen message appears when switching on. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the OK button, the TV switches back off automatically for safety reasons.

Sorting The programmes can be sorted either according to their start times (chronologically) or according to stations (corresponding to station list).

Teletext

Teletext

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Teletext - 1

Your TV set supports the two operating systems TOP Text and FLOF. Up to 2,000 pages are stored so that you have quick access.

Starting and ending Teletext

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Starting and ending Teletext - 1

Switch Teletext on / off.

If HbbTV is offered by the channel, then the MediaTek/HbbTV text ^1 opens up (see page 80).

In this case, pressing the TEXT button again opens the "standard" teletext/videotext.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Starting and ending Teletext - 2

Page selection with the coloured buttons

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Page selection with the coloured buttons - 1

Red button: Back to the previously viewed page.

Green button: On to next page.

Yellow button: To next topic.

Blue button: To next range of topics.

The coloured bars (for TOP) or the coloured text (for FLOF) in the second last line indicate which coloured buttons you can use to page through topic areas and topics.

Teletext page displays

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Teletext page displays - 1

0 AV: Stop self changing pages.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Teletext page displays - 2

9: Enlarge page (press several times).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Teletext page displays - 3

PIP: Show / hide TV picture (full screen/split screen).

Additional page selection possibilities

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Additional page selection possibilities - 1

1st possibility:

Call overview page 100.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Additional page selection possibilities - 2

2nd possibility:

Directly enter the page number.

3rd possibility:

The page includes 3-digit page numbers.

Mark desired page number.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - 3rd possibility: - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - 3rd possibility: - 2

The page consists of several sub-pages (indicated by the selection option on the last line).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - 3rd possibility: - 3

◀ ▶ Page through sub-pages.

Call TOP table

The table can only be called for stations with the TOP operating system.

OK Call TOP table.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Call TOP table. - 1

Programming timer recordings via Teletext

→ Teletext is started, if not, press the TEXT button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming timer recordings via Teletext - 1

Call the programme pages of the current station.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming timer recordings via Teletext - 2

Green button: Go to the appropriate page.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming timer recordings via Teletext - 3

▼▲ Select the desired programme, OK to programme the recording.

Change the appropriate recording data in the following menu Timer data if necessary (see also page 122, "The direct way to record").

OK Confirm.

Changing teletext station

You can change the teletext provider independently of the DVB station you are watching.

The function is only available if two reception channels are available in the TV set (see Equipment variants on page 140). The teletext provider can only be changed if a DVB station was selected as a TV picture

→ Teletext is started, if not, press the TEXT button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changing teletext station - 1

P+/P- Select next/previous station.

The TV set switches through all the stations in the Station list (see page 30) or the current Favourites list (see page 31) one after another.

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changing teletext station - 2

◀ ▶ Select Station selection, OK call station.

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select station as in the station list (page 30), OK call station.

Teletext menu

In the Teletext menu you can activate messages, reveal pages and configure the teletext with the Settings menu function.

Starting the Teletext menu

→ Teletext is started, if not, press the TEXT button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Starting the Teletext menu - 1

MENU: Call the Teletext menu.

13:00 ARD-Mittagsmagazin .... 312 14:00 Tagesschau Tagesachau .... 110/112 Kultur .... 500 Wetter .... 170 Gesellschaft .... 670 TELETEXT MENU Station selection •••• Newsflash Reveal Recording wizard Settings

Explanations of the Teletext menu functions:

Station selection You can select the teletext of a different station here (see left hand column).

Newsflash The current page is hidden when you activate Newsflash. A symbol at the top left indicates that the function is active. If the contents of the message are updated and it is a small newsflash, this is displayed in the TV picture. If it is a full screen page, the symbol is displayed in blue and the page can be called with the OK button.

Reveal Shows concealed information, e.g. for quiz questions or VPS pages in the programme preview pages.

Recording wizard A wizard for recording via teletext helps to programme an external recorder or the integrated Digital Recorder, see also left column.

Settings Other Teletext menu functions:

Preview pages Input of the first teletext programme preview page if this deviates from the factory setting (page 301).

Sub-title Input of the teletext subtitle pages for every station if this pages deviates from the factory setting (page 150).

Personal text pages Define up to six teletext pages which can be opened later from a list in the menu Teletext functions → Personal text pages (in TV mode press green button, see page 38).

Character set Teletext character set can be switched to other languages (Russian, Greek, Polish and Turkish).

Digital radioTeletext

Interactive data services (Digital teletext/MHEG-5)

In some countries, the stations also transmit interactive data services with their programmes (e.g. Digital teletext/MHEG-5), whereby the functions of individual keys are not available or only so to a limited extent.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Interactive data services (Digital teletext/MHEG-5) - 1

The symbol indicates which functions can differ for a application.

In the UK or Ireland, the teletext for DVB-T stations is transmitted as per the MHEG-5 standard. It contains text, graphics, functions and links.

→ Available in e.g., UK, Ireland, New Zealand.
→ Digital teletext is not available when DVB subtitles are being displayed.

The operation of these menus depends on the particular provider. Normally after a station is changed, the provider broadcasting the digital teletext makes an introductory offer for this service on the screen via menu selection. Follow these notes.

If no message appears telling you how to switch to digital teletext after switching to another station, press the TEXT key. If a selection for DVB subtitles is available, this item must be hidden before.

Depending on the provider's respective offer, you can use the ▲▼◀▶ buttons and the OK button, the coloured buttons, the END/TEXT button and sometimes even the numeric buttons.

If you want to close the digital teletext, just select a different station using the P+/P- buttons or follow the menu prompts on the screen.

Radio mode (DVB radio)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode (DVB radio) - 1

The TV set can receive digital radio stations over DVB or over the internet (see page 54).

In addition you can play the sound from an external device through the TV set via the audio/AV inputs of the TV set (see page 53).

The AUDIO button has been preset for radio operation in the factory. To change the configuration see page 125.

Radio mode on

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode on - 1

Press AUDIO button on the remote control.

The radio mode that was last selected will be opened (DVB or internet radio).

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode on - 2

MEDIA: Call MediaPortal.

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select DVB radio, OK call.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode on - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode on - 4

Or:

R on the operating ring on the TV set.

You see and information window about the currently set station.

RADIO DIGITAL DVB radio 1 DLF 12:10 - 13:30 Informationen am Mittag Berichte, Interviews, Musik Volume 30 Station list Screen option Previous station

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode on - 6

If a connection to the internet is already established:

▶ Change between DVB radio and Internet radio (see page 54).

Setting the volume

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting the volume - 1

V+/V- Volume louder / quieter.

Other sound settings are the same as for the volume setting in TV mode (see page 32).

Sound mode

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Sound mode - 1

Call Sound mode

Other settings as for TV mode (see page 32).

Digital radio

Station switching (DVB radio)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Station switching (DVB radio) - 1

The selection of the stations / favourites is the same as the procedure in TV mode (see pages 30 and 31).

Press P+/P− or the numeric buttons of the remote control.

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Station switching (DVB radio) - 2

+ / - on the TV set operating ring.

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Station switching (DVB radio) - 3

OK Call station list / favourites.

Switching the screen on/off

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the screen on/off - 1

Red button: Switch off the screen.

Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the TV set.

The LED display on the TV set (see page 10) changes from green to orange.

Switch on the screen with the remote control:

Red button, AUDIO button or OK button (station list is opened).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the screen on/off - 2

Switch on the screen on the TV set: Press R on the TV set operating ring

Radiomenu

In the Radio menu, you can set the sound, search for and store radio stations (automatically or manually), change stations and set switch off/alarm functions.

The settings are made as described in TV mode.

Call Radio menu

Radio mode switched on, if not, see page 52.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call Radio menu - 1

MENU: Call the Radio menu.
RADIO MENU Sound Station Timer functions Sound mode ...

Switch off radio mode

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switch off radio mode - 1

Press TV button

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switch off radio mode - 2

END button on the remote control.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switch off radio mode - 3

Or:

R on the operating ring on the TV set.

EPG – Electronic Programme Guide (radio)

You can also use an electronic programme guide for the DVB radio stations if the radio stations provide programme information.

Starting and ending EPG

Radio mode switched on, if not, see page 52.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Starting and ending EPG - 1

EPG: Switch EPG on / off.
Date MON 31.07. Time now until:17.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 Station all Topics all Bayern 1 16:00-16:06 Nachrichten Bayern 2 16:00-16:03 Nachrichten BAYERN 3 16:00-16:04 Nachrichten BAYERN 4 K... 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten D5 aktuell 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten hr1 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten hr2 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten hr3 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten hr4 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten Nachrichten - Welt, Deutschland, Bayern

The EPG functions in radio mode are the same as in TV mode. Read from page 48 onwards for further information.

EPG configuration (radio)

The EPG settings in Radio mode correspond to those in TV mode (see page 49). If the EPG menu is called up in Radio mode, only radio stations will be included in the station selection.

As already indicated under EPG configuration in TV mode (see page 49), we recommend omitting all radio stations unimportant to you in the EPG station selection for Radio mode (do not highlight with ☑). This gives you a clearer overview in the EPG, as there are a large number of stations for the signal source DVB-S in particular.

The collection of EPG data can also be shorted significantly by this.

Digital radio

Radio mode (Internet radio)

The TV set can receive digital radio stations over DVB (see page 52) or over the internet. In addition you can play the sound from an external device through the TV set via the audio/AV inputs of the TV set (see page 53).

The AUDIO button has been preset for radio operation in the factory. To change the configuration see page 125.
Internet radio is only accessible if a connection to the internet has been established.

Radio mode on

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode on - 1

Press AUDIO button on the remote control.

The radio mode that was last selected will be opened (DVB or internet radio).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode on - 2

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode on - 3

MEDIA: Call MediaPortal.

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select Internet radio, OK call.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode on - 4

Or:

R on the operating ring on the TV set.

You see and information window about the currently set station. The station overview appears the first time you call up Internet radio (see right column).

RADIO DIGITAL Internet radio "Rock Antenne Heavy Metal" Artist: Judas Priest - Living after midnight Playtime: 02:25 Station list Screen action

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Radio mode on - 6

If a connection to the internet is already established:

▶ Change between DVB radio and Internet radio (see page 52).

Setting the volume

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting the volume - 1

V+/V- Volume louder / quieter.

Other sound settings are the same as for the volume setting in TV mode (see page 32).

Station list (internet radio)

INTERNET RADIO Local Germany by Location by Genre Popular stations New stations All stations Highlighted stations Alternative Ambient Blues Business news Coltic Christian Contemporary Classic Rock Classical College Elements 5

When playing Internet radio stations, the folder names specified by the provider vTuner are adopted for display on the TV.

For further operation, see General navigation in the media overview on page67.

Sound mode

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Sound mode - 1

Call Sound mode

Other settings as for TV mode (see page 32).

Switching the screen on/off

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the screen on/off - 1

Red button: Switch off the screen.

Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the TV set.

The LED display on the TV set (see page 10) changes from green to orange.

Switch on the screen with the remote control:

Red button, AUDIO button or OK button (station list is opened).

Switch on the screen on the TV set: Press R on the TV set operating ring.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching the screen on/off - 2

Switch off radio mode

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switch off radio mode - 1

Press TV button or

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switch off radio mode - 2

END button on the remote control.

Digital radio

Audio playback from external devices

You can play the sound of external AV devices (e.g. MP3 players, DVD players) in radio mode.

Connecting an external appliance (e.g. MP3 player)

Connect the output (jack) of the MP3 player to the cinch audio in sockets L/R (white/red) of the TV set.

MP3 player TV set AUDIO IN L/R

Connection example of an MP3 player

Select AV input

Radio mode switched on, if not, see page 52.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select AV input - 1

OK Open station list.

The AV inputs are listed before the first radio station in a numerically sorted list.

STATION LIST AUDIO DIGITAL IN AUDIO IN HDMI 3 HDMI 2 HDMI 1 AVS AV 1 Bayem 1 C 2 Bayem 2 C 3 Bayem 3 C 4 DKULTUR E 5 BS aktuell C 6 hr1 F 7 hr2 C 8 hr3 C 9 hr4 C 10 BR Verkehr C 11 BS plus B 12 MDR Sputnik C 13 JUMP C 14 NDR 90,3 C 15 Nordwestradio C 16 Nordwestradio C Switch to ... Select Station Frequencies PIP scan Changes stations Soft alphabetically

The selection of the AV inputs is the same as in TV mode (see page 31).

Start playback on the external device after selecting the AV input.

Other settings

Parental lock

You can select and set various security options to prevent unauthorised use of the TV set and to protect your children from unsuitable programmes.

Defining the access code (PIN)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Defining the access code (PIN) - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Defining the access code (PIN) - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Defining the access code (PIN) - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Defining the access code (PIN) - 4

◀ ▶ SelectSettings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
▶ SelectParental lock,
▼ go to the menu line below.

Define a four digit access code (PIN) the first time you open it. The numbers appear in plain text. Note the access code (PIN) well.

OK Confirm the access code (PIN).

The Parental lock menu is opened.

TV MENU Settings Parental lock Lock all stations Lock single stations Age-related lock Immediately

The four-digit access code (PIN) must be entered when the parental lock is opened in future. It appears encrypted (****) when entering for security reasons.

TV MENU Settings Parental lock Access code *+* Please enter FIR

Codenumber

The code number cancels all entered PINs. It can be used for example if you have forgotten your PIN. You will find a note about the code number on page 143. Remove this from the manual and keep it in a safe place.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Parental lock menu:

Lock all stationsThe TV set is locked immediately the menu is exited. All programmes can then only be watched after entering the access code. The lock can be activated both Immediately and for a Daily defined period.The lock remains active until it is switched off in the menu.
Lock single stationsYou can lock / unlock individual or all of the stations in the station list specifically.The lock remains active until it is switched off in the menu.
Age-related lockSome DVB stations also broadcast an age classification.If the age set here is below the broadcast age limit, the programme can only be watched after entering the access code.
Change access codeYou can change your access code at any time. Enter the new access code in place of the old one.
DeactivateAll set parental locks (locked stations, age-dependent locks, locked films in the DR archive/Video archive ^(1) ) are cancelled. The current secret code is deleted. When the parental lock is reactivated all the previous parental locks are set again automatically.
ResetAll currently set parental locks are finally cancelled. The secret code is deleted.

Protection of minors for CI Plus programmes

Youth-protected broadcasts of programme providers with CI Plus encoding possibly require you to enter the secret number (PIN) of the CA module.

We recommend selecting the secret number of the TV set according to the secret number of the CA module, since the secret number of the CA module cannot be changed. This means that you must only remember one secret number.

Other settings

Timer functions

This menu offers you convenient alarm services. Programmed alarms are also active when the TV set has been switched off to standby. If the TV set switches on from the standby mode by alarm, a screen message appears. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the OK button, the TV switches back off automatically for safety reasons.

The TV set can also be switched off automatically at certain times. A screen warning appears one minute before automatic switch off. The automatic switch off can be interrupted by pressing any button.

Call Timer functions

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call Timer functions - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call Timer functions - 2

◀ ▶ SelectSettings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ SelectTimer functions,
▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Settings Timer functions Switch off once Switch off daily One-time alarm Wake up Mo no ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 2

◀ ▶ Select the desired setting.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Timer functions menu:

Switch off once The set switches to the standby mode automatically at the specified time.
If a time is specified which has already passed on the same day, the set switches off at this time the next day.
Switch off daily The set regularly switches to the standby mode automatically every day at the specified time.
One-time alarm The set alerts you once today at the specified time. If a time was specified which has already passed on the same day, the alarm is saved for the next day.
Wake up The set regularly alerts you from Monday to Friday at Mon-Fri the set time.
Wake up Sat The set alerts you regularly every Saturday at the specified time.
Wake up Sun The set alerts you regularly every Sunday at the specified time.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Timer functions menu:

Wake up with Specify whether the TV set switches on in the event of an alarm from the standby mode in TV or radio mode with the respectively last active station.

Wake up signal volume Set the desired volume of the alarm tone. The alarm tone is emitted as a continuous tone as a guide during the setting.

Language

Specify the language for all menus in the TV set in the language menu. The language for the DVB subtitles and the film language can be set for DVB programmes.

Call language

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call language - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 1

◀ ▶ SelectSettings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ SelectLanguage,
▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Settings Language Menu language Subtitle (DVB) Audio (DVB)

◀ ▶ Select the desired setting.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Language menu:

Menu You can change the menu language here. The menu language guage can be changed with the index (siehe Seite 15).

Subtitle (DVB) If subtitles are provided by the DVB station, you can set your desired language in advance here. If this is included in the range of languages of the station, it will be shown automatically.

You can also specify an alternative language under this menu item, in case your chosen language is not offered by the station

Audio (DVB) Specify your desired film language in advance here. If this is included in the range of languages of the station, it will be shown automatically.

You can also specify an alternative language under this menu item, in case your chosen language is not offered by the station.

Other settings

On-screen displays

You can select different settings in this menu which affect the on-screen displays.

Call On-screen displays

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call On-screen displays - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 1

SelectSettings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
SelectMiscellaneous,
▼ go to the menu line below.

▶ Select On-screen displays,

▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Settings Miscellaneous On-screen displays On-screen display time On-screen display position Volume Autom 7 s

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 3

Select the desired setting.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the On-screen displays menu:

On-screen display time Here you set the duration of the display, e.g. for the volume or the station display when changing stations. The duration can be set between 2 and 9 seconds.

On-screen You can select between an upper and a lower display position display position so that other displays (subtitles) are not concealed.

Volume Here you set whether or not the change in the volume should also be displayed visually on the screen.

Automatic info Select yes here if you want to be able to see the additional help permanently in the upper part of the screen while navigating the menu. Also see page 15 for further information.

Permanent The time can be displayed permanently with this menu clock display item or by pressing the button twice in quick succession (see also page 39). It is always visible as long as no other display is made.

Automatic If you switch to an HDMI programme place to which hint after switch to HDMI a Digital Link HD-capable device is connected (see also page 113), a reference to the adapted function of the remote control always appears when yes is set.

Time and date

If you receive a station with teletext after switching on the TV, the time and date are recorded automatically. The date may have to be entered manually for some stations.

Enter the time and date manually if you receive station without teletext.

Call Time and date

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call Time and date - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 1

SelectSettings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ SelectMiscellaneous,
▼ go to the menu line below.

▶ Select Time and date,

▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Settings Miscellaneous Time and date Time 14:32:21 Deviation from Universal Time Date Beginning of

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 3

◀ ▶ Select the desired setting.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Time and date menu:

If a definite time has been identified by the TV set (dependent on the channel), certain menu items may not be available.

Time Enter the time (00:00 to 23:59) with the numeric buttons of the remote control.

Deviation from Universal Time The current time at the Greenwich Meridian 0 is to be understood as world time. The time shift in relation to this time must be given in hours (-11 to +13) (with the buttons ◀ ▶ or the numeric buttons on the remote control). Summer time is ignored.

Date Enter the date (day.month.year) with the numeric buttons on the remote control.

Beginning of daylight-saving time Enter the date on which the time is switched over to summer time if it deviates from the automatically calculated date.

End of daylight-saving time Enter the date on which the summer time ends if it deviates from the automatically calculated date.

Coded Stations

Conditional Access module (CA module)

In order to receive coded digital stations, a Conditional Access module (CA module) and a Smart Card must be inserted in the CI slot of your TV set (see page 11).

The CA module and the Smart Card are not part of the TV set's scope of delivery. They are usually available from your dealer. Loewe does not provide any guarantee for the functioning of the CA module.

The TV set must first recognise and set up the CA module during initial operation. Therefore, it can take up to a minute until decoding starts during initial operation.

Inserting the Smart Card into the CA module

Push the Smart Card into the CA module as far as it goes so that the side with the gold coloured contact chip is facing the side of the CA module marked with the provider's logo. Note the direction of the arrow printed on the Smart Card.

CA module (Side with the provider's brand legal) Smart Card Contact side

Inserting the CA module in the CI slot

Switch off the TV set's mains switch.

Remove the cover from the rear of the set.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Inserting the CA module in the CI slot - 1
Ejector button

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Inserting the CA module in the CI slot - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["开始"] --> B{是否需要审批}
    B -->|是| C["提交审批"]
    B -->|否| D["退回修改"]
    C --> E["归档"]
    D --> F["结束"]

Carefully insert the CA module in CI slot 1 or CI slot 2 with the contact side forward.

If you are standing in front of the TV set (display) then the logo on the CA module must be pointing to the rear. Do not use force. Make sure the module is not twisted in the process. If the CA module is correctly installed, the ejector button protrudes a little further.

Replace the cover.

Searching for encrypted stations

The search wizard must only be started if the setting option no has been selected during first installation in the search for encrypted stations and no CA-module was inserted.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Searching for encrypted stations - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Searching for encrypted stations - 2

Select Settings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Select Stations,
▼ go to the menu line below.
▶ Select Search wizard,
▼ go to the menu line below.
Select Change search settings,

OK wizard guides you through the search settings.

See page 42 for a description of the search settings.

Calling CA module information

This menu is only available for digital stations and when a CA module is plugged in.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Calling CA module information - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Calling CA module information - 2

◀ ▶ SelectCA module: xxx, OK call information.

The content of this menu depends on the provider of the CA module.

The CA module information can also be called up in the TV menu under Settings → Other → CA module: xxx (xxx corresponds to the CA module provider).

Removing the CA module

→ Switch off the TV set's mains switch.

Remove the cover from the rear of the set.

Press in the ejector button on the appropriate module drawer, the module is released.

Remove the module from the set.

Replace the cover.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Removing the CA module - 1

Media+

General information on Media+

MediaHome gives you access to photos, videos and music from your personal storage media, e.g. from storage media connected via USB and from media servers in your home network to which your TV set is connected. MediaNet delivers multimedia data from the Internet.

Please follow the information in the right column for the Internet functions.

MEDIA PORTAL TV DV6 radio Internet Radio DR archive DR - Streaming MediaHome MediaNet Video podcasts RECOMMENDATIONS Focus TV/Z09 Online BR RADIO DELUXE LOUNGE RADIO Bdolf - Dcn Fusball-Radio Klassik Radio/Tim CSP

Connecting the TV set to your network

To receive media via media servers in your home network or via the Internet, you have to integrate your TV set in your home network. You can connect your TV set both with a wired connection (Ethernet, PowerLine) or via a wireless radio connection (WLAN) ^1 . The TV set has an internal WLAN antenna ^1 . You can find connection examples for both cases on page 19.

The TV sets are provided with a standard network configuration ex works (automatic assignment of the IP address, WLAN deactivated ^1 ). The TV set can normally have a wired connection to your home network without any problems when using these default settings. For a wireless connection ^1 or for integration in special networks, please select the corresponding settings in the Media menu (see page 62).

Your Loewe TV set supports the UPnP AV standard for data playback in the home network. You can find more detailed information on this in the technical data on page 137 and in the glossary from page 144 onwards.

MediaNet

If you wish to use the internet functions, we recommend registering your TV set on our homepage.

http://support.loewe.tv (International),

http://support.loewe.tv/uk (United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland),

http://support.loewe.tv/au (Australia) or

http://support.loewe.tv/nz (New Zealand)

(under Register now).

Simply follow the steps in the registration process.

The MAC address of your TV set is required for the registration. You can find this in the index of the TV set under Integrated features – MAC address (TV).

Some of the Internet functions described below may not be available (see also MediaUpdate chapter below). The general availability and range of Internet functions are entirely dependent on the provider. Loewe has no influence over the long-term availability of individual offers.
The content shown in the Recommendations area may change from time to time without prior notice.

Help for configuration problems

Loewe cannot provide any support for PC hardware and software or network components owing to the diverse configuration options with home networks.

Please contact the administrator of your home network and/or specialist dealer for support when setting up and for maintenance of network connections, storage media, media server software and network devices, e.g. routers.

MediaUpdate - additional functions

Additional functions in the MediaPortal are planned, particularly for Loewe Media+. You can update your TV set yourself. You will find new software versions on our internet page.

You can find notes on carrying out a software update on page 126.

Media+

Accessing your media

MEDIA

MEDIA: Call MediaPortal.

MEDIA PORTAL TV DVB radio Internet radio DR archive DR - Streaming MediaHome MediaNet Video podcasts RECOMMENDATIONS Focus TV/20 RADIO DELUXE LOUNGE RADIO 360ft - Don Fuskbol Radio Khasik Radiolim

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Accessing your media - 2

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Mark desired function, OK call function.

MediaHome: see page 66.

MediaNet: see page 70.

Video podcasts: see page 75.

Playing music and videos, displaying images

The windows for playing music and videos and for displaying photos are comparable for all cases irrespective of the media source. The relevant players are therefore grouped together:

MediaMusic (including Internet radio): see page 76.

MediaPhoto: see page 77.

MediaVideo: see page 78.

Quitmedia

MEDIA

Call MediaPortal and select other function (see left column).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Quitmedia - 1

AUDIO

Or:

Press TV or AUDIO button for changing to TV or radio mode ^(1) .

END

Oder:

Press END button in the MediaPortal main level to change to the last active operating mode (TV, radio).

Media+

Media menu

The Media menu is used for making settings to your network adapter and the various types of media (photo, music, video).

MediaPortal is open.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Media menu - 1

MENU: Call / close Media menu.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Media menu - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Media menu - 3

▶ Select desired menu item,
▼ go to the menu line below.

◀ ▶ Select the desired setting, OK call.

Network settings: see right column.

Photo settings: see page 65.

Music settings: see page 65.

Video settings: see page 65.

Explanation of the setting possibilities in Network settings menu

Network You can activate or deactivate the network settings of access your TV set here.

MEDIA MENU Network settings Network access On, wired only Other

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of the setting possibilities in Network settings menu - 2

◀ ▶ Select Network access,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Select the type of access required.

off deactivates all existing network adapters of your TV set.

On, wired only: Access to the network only via a network cable. The wireless access is deactivated.

On, wireless only ^(1) : Access to the network only via WLAN. The access via a network cable is deactivated.

On, wireless + bridge function ^[1] : Both network adapters are activated. Wireless Internet access is possible (WLAN). Internet-enabled devices connected to the network socket (LAN) (e.g. Loewe MediaCenter, Loewe BluTechVision Interactive) can use the wireless connection of the TV set to access the Internet via the WLAN bridge function.

Under no circumstances may the TV set be wired and at the same time connected by a wireless connection to the same network, e.g. router. This may cause severe operational faults!

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of the setting possibilities in Network settings menu - 3

OK Adopt access type or change Current settings for the adapter.

Media+

Configuration of the built-in LAN adapter

You will see an overview of the current settings for the selected network adapter (for an explanation of the points, see page 64).

NETWORK WIZARD: WIRED Current adapter settings: IP configuration Manual IP address 192.168.2.123 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Gateway 192.168.2.1 DNS server 1 192.168.2.1 DNS server 2 192.168.2.1 Additional adapter data: MAC address 00:09:82:11:99:11

OK Change settings for the network adapter.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of the built-in LAN adapter - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of the built-in LAN adapter - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of the built-in LAN adapter - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of the built-in LAN adapter - 5

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of the built-in LAN adapter - 6

◀ ▶ Select type of IP configuration.

Manual: Enter your fixed static IP address manually (see below).

Automatic: Automatic configuration of the IP address via DHCP server or via multiple protocols according to UPnP specification (including DHCP).

OK Proceed.

If manual has been selected under IP configuration:

▲▼ Enter IP, Subnet mask, Gateway and DNS server addresses in succession with the numeric keys on the remote control.

OK Proceed.

You will now see an updated overview of the settings for the network adapter.

OK End of wizard.

Configuration of a wireless adapter (e.g. WLAN bridge adapter) ^1

You will see an overview of the current settings of the network adapter (see left column).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of a wireless adapter (e.g. WLAN bridge adapter) ^1 - 1

OK Change settings for the network adapter.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of a wireless adapter (e.g. WLAN bridge adapter) ^1 - 2

The TV set now searches for wireless routers.

Red button: Stop search.

After the end of the search:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of a wireless adapter (e.g. WLAN bridge adapter) ^1 - 3

▲▼ Select required base station from the options found. OK Proceed.

If the desired access point is not found:

Red button: Repeat the search. Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of a wireless adapter (e.g. WLAN bridge adapter) ^1 - 4

Yellow button: Specify base station manually, e.g. if the SSID of the access point is not transferred. Same procedure as for Rename station, see page 44.

If your wireless network has an encryption:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of a wireless adapter (e.g. WLAN bridge adapter) ^1 - 5

Numeric buttons: Enter WLAN password (procedure same as Rename stations, see page 44).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of a wireless adapter (e.g. WLAN bridge adapter) ^1 - 6

Green button: Switch from lower case to capital letters and vice versa.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of a wireless adapter (e.g. WLAN bridge adapter) ^1 - 7

Delete last character.

Contact your network administrator if you do not know the WLAN code.
For encryption types supported, see page 137.

For WEP encryption:

▲▼ Select the WEP index, OK Proceed.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Configuration of a wireless adapter (e.g. WLAN bridge adapter) ^1 - 8

▶ Select type of IP configuration (see left column).

You will now see an updated overview of the settings for the network adapter.

OK End of wizard.

Media+

Explanation of the adapter settings

IP The current assignment method for the IP address of configuration your TV set.

IP address Your current IP address.

Subnet mask Your current subnet-mask IP address.

Gateway (only for IP configuration → manual)

Your manually set gateway IP address.

DNS server 1 (only for IP configuration → manual) Your manually set first DNS server IP address.

DNS server 2 (only for IP configuration → manual) Your manually set second DNS server IP address.

Network SSID The name of your network.

MAC address Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hardware (TV) of your TV set's wired network adapter (LAN).

MAC address Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hardware (WLAN) of your TV set's wireless network adapter (WLAN).

Link status Gives you information about the current status of your wireless connection (save settings, connecting, login failed, access point not found, not connected, connection established).

Link quality Specifies the signal strength as a percentage.

Explanation of the setting possibilities in Network settings menu (continued)

Other This menu contains settings which have to be changed less frequently.

MEDIA MENU Network settings access Other

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of the setting possibilities in Network settings menu (continued) - 2

◀ ▶ Select Other,

OK call other network settings.

▲▼ Select desired setting,
◀ ▶ or numeric buttons: Perform changes.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of the setting possibilities in Network settings menu (continued) - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of the setting possibilities in Network settings menu (continued) - 4

Enter characters (procedure same as Rename stations, see page 44).

Host name: Give your TV set a name so that it can be uniquely identified in the network.

Use proxy server: Indicate whether your network access is to be direct or via a proxy server.

A proxy server is not necessary for most home networks.
Contact your home network administrator if you are unclear about the proxy server settings.

Proxy server name:

(only available if Use proxy server → yes)

Indicate the name or IP address of the proxy server used.

Proxy port number:

(only available if Use proxy server → yes)

Indicate the network port number.

Proxy server requires login:

(only available if Use proxy server → yes)

Specify whether your proxy server requires a special login.

User name and Password:

(only available if Proxy server requires login → yes)

Enter your login data for the proxy server.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - User name and Password: - 1

MENU: Quit Other network settings menu.

Media+

Explanation of the setting possibilities in the Photo settings menu

The menu can only be opened when a photo is displayed (see page 77).

Go to ... Skip to a definite picture or to the start/end of the current folder.

Picture display Display pictures in optimal size or in original resolution.

Picture change Select how long each picture is to be shown during a slideshow

Picture Three picture transitions can be chosen for the picture crossovers change. You can have alternately running picture transitions.

Picture settings You can carry out the picture settings for the photo display here. The settings correspond to the picture settings in TV mode (see page 34).

Explanation of the setting possibilities in the Music settings menu

The menu can only be opened when the Music Player is displayed (see page 76).

Sound settings You can carry out the audio settings for playing music here. The settings correspond to the audio settings in TV mode (see page 32).

Explanation of the setting possibilities in the Video settings menu

The menu can only be opened when the Video Player is displayed (see page 78).

Picture settings You can make the picture settings for playing videos here. The settings correspond to the picture settings in TV mode (see page 34).

Sound settings You can carry out the audio settings for playing videos here. The settings correspond to the audio settings in TV mode (see page 32).

Media+

MediaHome

MediaHome includes both storage media directly connected to the TV set (e.g. USB sticks) as well as data provided in your home network (e.g. from a media server on a PC or a network hard drive).

MediaPortal is open.

MEDIA PORTAL TV EVB radio Intermedia DR archive DR - Streaming MediaHome MediaNet Video podcasts RECOMMENDATIONS Focus TV-ZB Online BR RADIO DELUXE LOUNGE RADIO Stoff-Don Fussball Radio Klassik Radiofilm

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MediaHome - 2

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Mark MediaHome,

OK activate.

MEDIA HOME MediaCenter TwonkyMedia USB 1WMP11 USB 2 Urmount medium before removing

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MediaHome - 4

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Mark desired media source.

OK Open highlighted media source. All available content will be shown.

The media sources shown here depend on the devices available/used.

MediaCenter A Loewe MediaCenter connected to your home network.

TwonkyMedia Examples with media servers in your home network. The WMP11 exact designation depends on the media server used.

USB USB storage media on the USB connections of your TV set. The exact designation depends on the relevant storage medium.

Please also observe the notes on page 126 regarding USB sticks!

Unmounting USB storage media

You should unmount USB storage media properly after use before removing them from the TV set. This avoids a loss of data.

A USB storage medium is marked in MediaHome.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Unmounting USB storage media - 1

Green button: Unmount USB storage medium before removing it.

Once unmounted, the USB storage medium cannot be used again until it is reinserted!

Media+

General navigation in the media overview

The graphics on this page typically show a two-column list view. You can switch between the views as required (see page 68).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - General navigation in the media overview - 1

▲▼ Select desired folder.

LOEWE USB (USB) Music Photo Video Titles Artists Albums Categories Playlist Files Elements 3 Change view

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - General navigation in the media overview - 3

▶ Open marked folder. The content of the folder is displayed in the right window.
Go back a folder level if necessary.

LOEWE_USB (USB) Music Photo Video !Music/ Titles Artists Albums Categories Playlist Files Elements 5 Change view

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - General navigation in the media overview - 5

Repeat procedure if necessary. The content of the selected folder is still displayed in the right window, the previous folder structure in the left window.

LOEWE_USB (USB) Titles Artists Albums Categories Playlist Files Alan Parsons Project Alphaville Backstreet Boys Bad Boys Blue Barclay James Harvest Bee Gees Benton Franz Captain Hollywood Project Carey Tony Cocker Joe Cretu Michael /Music/Artists/ Elements 38 Change view

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - General navigation in the media overview - 7

▲▼ Select media file (example below: music title). OK Play/display selected media file.

LOEWE_USB (USB) Album Ammonia Avenue Eye Eye In The Sky I Robot Pyramid Tales Of Mystery And Imagination The Turn Of A Friendly Card Vulture Culture Title Prime Time Let Me Go Home One Good Reason Since The Last Goodbye Don't Answer Me Dancing On A Highway You Don't Believe Pipeline Ammonia Avenue /.../Artists/Alan Parsons Project/Ammonia Avenue/ Elements 9 Lister Change view

Playing music: see MediaMusic, page 76.

Displaying photos: see MediaPhoto, page 77.

Playing videos: see MediaVideo, page 78.

Media+

Changeview

You can change the view of the displayed files and folders.

In the Media Overview:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changeview - 1

Yellow button: opens Change View, and:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changeview - 2

Green button: Switches over to two-column list view (see sample figures on page 67).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changeview - 3

Yellow button: Switches over to single-column list view (with picture for the element currently selected).

LOEWE USB (USB) The Emperor's New Clothes Dark Diamond Look Me, No Hands American Triangle Original Sin Birds I Want Love The Wasteland Ballad Of The Boy In The Red Shoes Love Her Like Me Manshield This Train Don't Stop There Anymore A...John, Elson/Songs From The West Coast Elements 13 Listen Page 4 (1/2) Change View

Single-column list - example with music titles

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changeview - 5

Blue button: Switches over to thumbnail view.

LOEWE_USB (USB) Elements 106:\Phi View Page at 11/9 Change view Slide show

Thumbnails - example with photo overview

Playing/displaying data from USB storage media

If a USB storage medium is selected as a source (see page 66), the following special features apply for actions and the media overview:

- The uppermost folder level is divided into three fixed categories:

Music

with the subfolders Titles, Artists, Albums, Categories, Playlists, Files (see below).

Photo

Video

- The original folder structure of the USB storage medium is retained in the media overview for Photo and Video. For playing Music, the available titles are prepared and offered in the above subfolders.

Subfolders in Music mode

Titles:

The music titles found on the USB storage model title name.

Artists:

The music titles found on the USB storage media by the respective artist.

Albums:

The music titles found on the USB storage med by album name.

Categories:

The music titles found on the USB storage medium are sorted by their respective musical categories (e.g. Jazz, Classical, Pop, Rock) and displayed correspondingly.

Playlists:

Display and play back any play lists that have been generated on the PC.

Files:

The music titles found on the USB storage m will be shown without being especially sorted (in order of file name).

Media+

Playing files from the home network

When using a media server in your home network as a source (see page 66), the names of the folders displayed are specified by the media server.

For further operation, see General navigation in the media overview on page 67.

TWONKY MEDIA (NETWORK) Music Photo Video By folder All music Playlist Smart playlist By album By artist By genre Artist/album Elements 3 Charge view

Example: Overview of a media server with the name Twonky Media

Media+

MediaNet

Under the menu item MediaNet you will find a continually expanding platform for interactive TV applications from the Internet. All applications are optimised for use on the TV. In addition, you can access Internet sites directly via the integrated Opera browser.

The web browser can also be used without an Internet connection. Thus you can access local devices which provide a web interface (e.g. router, home control, home network server).

Call MediaNet

MediaPortal is open.

MEDIA PORTAL TV DVD radio Internet radio DR archive DR - Streaming MediaHome MediaNet Video podcasts RECOMMENDATIONS Focus TV Focus Online ZOR DR RADIO DEUZE LOUKTE RADIO 3Soft - Den Futuristic Radio Khasak Radiofilm

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call MediaNet - 2

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select MediaNet, OK activate.

MEDIA NET All Topics Recommendations Favourites All Topics Picasa Edit favourites Internet Personal area Settings

The upper section of the MediaNet basis dialog contains Loewe Recommendations. The middle section displays your own Favourites (Edit favourites, see page 73). Depending on the topic selected (see right column), all the available online content matching the topic is displayed in the lower section.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call MediaNet - 4

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select the desired online content. OK Display/play content.

Topicselection

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Topicselection - 1

▲▼ GotoTopics.

Select the desired topic.

OK Confirm topic.

The content associated with the selected topic is displayed in the lower section.

Function of the coloured buttons in the basic MediaNet dialogue

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of the coloured buttons in the basic MediaNet dialogue - 1

Red button:

Edit favourites

Media content from the topic can be

defined as personal Favourites and the Favourites can also be moved or deleted.

See page 73.

Green button: Internet

You can enter Internet addresses here and open the associated Internet sites.

See page 71.

Yellow button: Personal area

Using a definable access code, you can define favourites and call up websites in the personal section.

See page 72.

Blue button: Configure MediaNet settings.

See page 74.

Media+

Internet

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Internet - 1

Green button: Call Internet.

MEDIA NET - INTERNET URL www.owve.de view do org cam net HISTORY a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s s t u v w x y z i j k l m n o p q r s s t u v w x y z i j k l m n o p q r s s t u v w x y z i j k l m n o p q r s S T U V W X Y Z R S G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z R S T U V W

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Internet - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Internet - 4

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select the desired symbols/terms, OK adopt to input line.

▲▼ Go to the input line.

If necessary:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Internet - 5

Yellow button: Delete characters to the left of the cursor.

When the Internet address (URL) is completely entered:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Internet - 6

OK View the website.

Edit Internet address History Back Zoom in

The functions of the coloured buttons are enabled even without the status line being shown.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Navigation in websites - 1

P+/P− Scroll the page vertically.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Navigation in websites - 2

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select link or text input field, OK open link or confirm text input.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Navigation in websites - 3

Letters and numbers can be entered into input fields on Internet sites either using the numeric buttons or a USB keyboard. Same procedure as for Rename station, see page 44.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Navigation in websites - 4

END: Cancel text input and exit input field.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Navigation in websites - 5

Yellow button: Zoom website.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Navigation in websites - 6

Move picture section.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Navigation in websites - 7

Yellow button: Re-display website at the original size.

Select other website / Quit Internet

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select other website / Quit Internet - 1

TEXT: Return to URL input window.

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select other website / Quit Internet - 2

Red button: Call History (previously visited websites). Delete history: see below.

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select other website / Quit Internet - 3

Green button: Exit Internet and go back to the MediaNet base dialogue.

Delete history

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete history - 1

The address input window is open (see left column).

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select the trash symbol next to the History entry to be deleted.

OK Delete an entry or the entire history.

Media+

Personalarea

In the personal area protected with an access code, you can store websites as favourites. In addition, the history of websites visited by you is managed separately from the history in the general Internet section (see page 71).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Personalarea - 1

Yellow button: Call Personal area.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Yellow button: Call Personal area. - 1

Define a four digit access code (PIN) the first time you open it. The numbers appear in plain text. Note the access code (PIN) well.

The access code in the personal section and the PIN of the parental lock (page 56) are independent of each other.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Yellow button: Call Personal area. - 2

The four-digit access code (PIN) must be entered when the parental lock is opened in future. It appears encrypted (****) when entering for security reasons.

MEDIA NET - PERSONAL AREA URL www.leeve.de view de p g com net HISTORY a b c d e f g h i ← www.loews.de j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z i j www.loews-kl.com 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 www.loews-it.com 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select the desired symbols/terms, OK adopt to input line.

▲▼ Go to the input line.

If necessary:

Green button: Delete characters to the left of the cursor.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Yellow button: Call Personal area. - 4

Blue button: Add the Internet address to favourites. For favourites, see right column.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Yellow button: Call Personal area. - 5

When the Internet address (URL) is completely entered: OK View the website.

See page 71 for further operation.

Personal area - Favourites

You can save up to four favourite websites in the personal section. These are displayed in the right part of the user interface under Favourites.

Enter the desired Internet address (URL) (see left column).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Personal area - Favourites - 1

▲▼ Go to the input line.

If necessary:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Personal area - Favourites - 2

Green button: Delete characters to the left of the cursor.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Personal area - Favourites - 3

Blue button: Add the Internet address to favourites.

The Internet address (URL) is added to the Favourites on the right side.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Personal area - Favourites - 4

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select Favourites entry,

OK transfer the Internet address to the input line.

OK View the website.

Delete favourites / history

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete favourites / history - 1

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select the trash symbol next to the Favourites or History entry to be deleted.

OK Delete entry or entire list.

Quit Personal area

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Quit Personal area - 1

TEXT: Return to URL input window.

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Quit Personal area - 2

Yellow button: Leave personal area and go back to the MediaNet base dialogue.

Media+

Edit MediaNet favourites

The middle section of the basic MediaNet dialogue contains the MediaNet favourites. You can define and delete these favourites or change their sequence as desired.

MediaNet is open (page 70).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 5

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 6

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 7

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 8

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 9

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 10

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 11

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 12

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 13

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 14

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 15

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 16

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 17

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 18

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 19

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 20

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 21

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 22

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 23

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 24

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 25

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 26

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 27

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 28

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 29

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 30

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 31

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 32

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 33

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 34

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 35

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 36

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 37

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 38

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Edit MediaNet favourites - 39

Add entry to favourites

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 5

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 6

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 7

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 8

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 9

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 10

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 11

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 12

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 13

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 14

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 15

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 16

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 17

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 18

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 19

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 20

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 21

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 22

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 23

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 24

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 25

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 26

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 27

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 28

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 29

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 30

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 31

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 32

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 33

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 34

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 35

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 36

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 37

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 38

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 39

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 40

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 41

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 42

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 43

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 44

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 45

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 46

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 47

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 48

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 49

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 50

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 51

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 52

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 53

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 54

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 55

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 56

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 57

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 58

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 59

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 60

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 61

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 62

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 63

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 64

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 65

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 66

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 67

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 68

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 69

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 70

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 71

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 72

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 73

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 74

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 75

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 76

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 77

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 78

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 79

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 80

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 81

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 82

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 83

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 84

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 85

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 86

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 87

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 88

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 89

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 90

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 91

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 92

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 93

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 94

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 95

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 96

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 97

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 98

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 99

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 100

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 101

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 102

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 103

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 104

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 105

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 106

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 107

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 108

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 109

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 110

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 111

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 112

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 113

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 114

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 115

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 116

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 117

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 118

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 119

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 120

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 121

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Add entry to favourites - 122

Favourites. MEDIA NET - EDIT FAVOURITES All Topics Recommendations fuid.de All Topics Favourites All Topics Pick up Back More favourite Delete favourite

Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 5

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 6

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 7

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 8

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 9

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 10

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 11

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 12

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 13

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 14

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 15

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 16

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 17

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 18

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 19

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 20

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 21

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 22

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 23

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 24

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 25

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 26

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 27

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 28

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 29

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 30

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 31

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 32

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 33

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 34

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 35

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 36

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 37

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 38

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 39

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 40

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 41

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 42

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 43

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 44

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 45

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 46

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 47

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 48

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 49

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 50

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 51

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 52

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 53

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 54

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 55

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 56

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 57

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 58

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 59

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 60

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 61

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 62

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 63

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 64

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 65

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 66

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 67

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 68

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 69

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 70

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 71

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 72

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 73

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 74

◀ ▶ Select the insertion position to which the selected favourite is to be moved.

MEDIA NET - EDIT FAVOURITES - MOVE FAVOURITE Topics All Recommendations Brid.de Ameristar.com D.aytrain SARAD TUR F Preferences Brid.de Ameristar.com D.aytrain SARAD TUR All Topics BERLIN Risikov JV TUR Lancopost SARAD TUR Kinder Brid.de Ameristar.com D.aytrain SARAD TUR Picasa Back Now off

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 76

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 77

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 78

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 79

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 80

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 81

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 82

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 83

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 84

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 85

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 86

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 87

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 88

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 89

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 90

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 91

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 92

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 93

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 94

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 95

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 96

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 97

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 98

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 99

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 100

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 101

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 102

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 103

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 104

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 105

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 106

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 107

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 108

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 109

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 110

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 111

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 112

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 113

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 114

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 115

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 116

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 117

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 118

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 119

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 120

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 121

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 122

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 123

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 124

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 125

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 126

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 127

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 128

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 129

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 130

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 131

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 132

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 133

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 134

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 135

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 136

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 137

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 138

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites - 139

Media+

MediaNetsettings

Here, you can find more setting options for MediaNet.

MediaNet is open (page 70).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MediaNetsettings - 1

Blue button: Call Settings.

MEDIA NET - SETTINGS Access code Final area Country selection You can change your access code to your personal area here. * * * * Member(s) Updates Rock

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MediaNetsettings - 3

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select the desired setting, OK call.

Access code

Here, you can define/change your MediaNet access code for the personal area. When changing, first enter the previous and then the new access code.

Personal area

Here, you can delete the entire personal section in a single step (favourites, history and access code). Press the red button to confirm the procedure.

Country selection

Select the countries whose online services you want to receive.

Favourites

You can delete here the Favourites in the MediaNet basis dialog (see page 73). Press the red button to confirm the procedure.

Factory settings

Reset MediaNet to status as at delivery (Favourites in MediaNet basis dialog, personal area, Internet history). Press the red button to confirm the procedure.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MediaNetsettings - 4

Blue button: Quit settings and go back to the basic MediaNet dialogue.

Media+

Video podcasts

MediaPortal is open.

MEDIA PORTAL TV DVB radio Inter-net audio DR archive DR + Streaming Media Home MediaNet Video podcasts RECOMMENDATIONS Focus TV ZO Online 201 BR RADIO DELUXE LOUNGE RADIO 3Soft - Den Fuzdool-Rzda Krasak RadioTime

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Video podcasts - 2

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select Video podcasts, OK activate.

VIDEO PODCASTS Favorites Video Podcasts by genre Video Podcasts by location Web-TV by genre Web-TV by location Animals Arts-Culture Arts-Interview Blog Bulisness Cars-Transportation Christian Comedy Comics Commentary Cooking Current Affairs Elements 5 Change View

The names of the folders in the Video Podcasts area are fixed by the provider vTuner and are adopted for display on the TV.

For further operation, see General navigation in the media overview on page 67.

Video podcasts by genre

The available video podcasts are sorted by genre and offered accordingly (see left column).

Video podcasts by country

The video podcasts that are available are sorted initially by region, then by country and are offered accordingly.

VIDEO PODCASTS Favorites Video Podcasts by genre Video Podcasts by location Web-TV by genre Web-TV by location Africa Asia Europe Middle East North America Oceania South America Elements 5 Change view

Web TV by genre

The available web TV videos are sorted by genre and offered accordingly.

VIDEO PODCASTS Favorites Video Podcasts by genre Video Podcasts by location Web-TV by genre Web-TV by location Music TV Religious TV Audio TV College TV Government TV Live Broadcast TV News TV On Demand TV Public TV Religious TV Shopping TV Sports Elements 5 Change view

Web TV by country

The web TV videos that are available are sorted initially by region, then by country and are offered accordingly.

VIDEO PODCASTS Favorites Video Podcasts by genre Video Podcasts by locatio Web-IV by genre Web-IV by location Africa Asia Caribbean Central America Europe Internet Only Middle East North America Oceania South America Elements 5 Change view

Media+

MediaMusic

A music title is highlighted in the media overview.

LOEWE USB (USB) Albums Ammonia Avenue Eye Eye In The Sky Gaudi I Robot Pyramid Stereotomy Tales Of Mystery And Ima... The Turn Of A Friendly Card Vulture Culture J.../Artists/Alan Parsons Project/Ammonia Avenue/ Title Prime Time Let Me Go Home One Good Reason Since The Last Goodbye Don't Answer Me Dancing On A Highwire You Don't Believe Pipeline Ammonia Avenue Elements 9 Userin Change view

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MediaMusic - 2

OK Play highlighted music title (see right column).

Play music files

A music title is highlighted.

OK Play music title.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Play music files - 1

MUSIC PLAYER "Dark Diamond" Stereo Artist: Elton John Album: Songs From The West Coast Playtime: 02:13 (04:26) back Screen offset Repeat Detail/Off Random Event

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Play music files - 3

PAUSE button: Pause current playback.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Play music files - 4

PLAY button: If playback is paused: Continue paused playback. For playback in progress: Play title from the beginning.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Play music files - 5

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Play music files - 6

short: Playback previous / next title. long: Rewind/fast forward.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Play music files - 7

OK Return to the overview without ending the current playback.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Play music files - 8

STOP button: End playback and return to overview.

Explanation of the symbols in the playback window

The symbols at the top right show you information about the current playback.

▶ Playback
II Pause
Rewind
Fast-forward
Replay current title
Replay all titles in the current folder
Random play activated

The bar behind the playtime shows you how far the music file has been played.

Function of coloured buttons during music playback

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of coloured buttons during music playback - 1

Red button: Switch screen off/on.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of coloured buttons during music playback - 2

Green button: Repeat individual title/all titles/Repeat off.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Function of coloured buttons during music playback - 3

Yellow button: For music files from local media Random play of files in currently selected folder on / off. for Internet radio: Change to the last radio station listened to.

Media+

MediaPhoto

A picture is selected in the media overview.

LOEWE_USB (USB) Photo Music Video Loewe_1_highres Loewe_2_highres Loewe_3_highres Loewe_4_highres Loewe_5_highres Loewe_6_highres Loewe_7_highres Loewe_8_highres Loewe_9_highres Loewe_10_highres Loewe_11_highres #Photo/ Elements 106 View Page 1/4 12/10 Change view

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MediaPhoto - 2

OK View marked picture in full screen mode (see below).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MediaPhoto - 3

PLAY button: Start slideshow (see right column).

Full-screenmode

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Full-screenmode - 1

A picture has been selected.

OK Opens full picture mode.

→ Portrait photos (with the corresponding entry in the Exif files) are automatically positioned correctly for viewing.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Full-screenmode - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Full-screenmode - 3

Show previous/next picture.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Full-screenmode - 4

▲▼ Rotate picture by 90 degrees to the left/right.

OK Quit full-screen mode and return to overview.

Slideshow

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slideshow - 1

PLAY button: Start slide show.

→ from photo overview: Start slide show with marked picture.
→ in full screen mode: Start slide show with displayed picture.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slideshow - 2

natural_image Exterior view of two modern blue-framed electronic devices with visible internal components and a wooden cover (no text or symbols)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slideshow - 3

PAUSE button: Pause slide show.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slideshow - 4

PLAY button: Continue slide show.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slideshow - 5

STOP button: End slide show and return to overview.

Media+

MediaVideo

A video is selected in the media overview.

LOEWE_USB (USB) Photo Music Video video1.avi video2.avi video2.wmv video3.avi video4.avi video5.avi video6.avi video6.wmv video7.avi video8.avi video9.avi #Video/ Elements 17 View Page 17. (1/2) Change View

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MediaVideo - 2

OK Play highlighted video (see right column).

Information on high-resolution films in general

Due to technical limitations (e.g. interference, limited bandwidth), interruptions to playback up to and including complete termination of the playback may occur when playing high definition film material (HD films) on 720p format or above (1280 x 720 resolution or above).

Information on high-resolution films via wireless connection ^1

High definition film material (HD films) from format 720p upwards (resolution 1280 x 720 or higher) should be played back via a wired connection. If there is a wireless connection, then technical limitations (e.g. fault liability, bandwidth limitations) can cause disruptions in the playback right up to a complete breakdown of the playback.

Playback

A video is selected.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback - 1

OK Play highlighted video.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback - 2

PAUSE button: Pause current playback.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback - 3

PLAY button: Continue paused playback.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback - 4

STOP button: Stop current playback and return to overview.

Video status bar

The video status bar provides you with further information about the current playback.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Video status bar - 1

INFO: Display/hide status bar/file information/context information.

Pressing the INFO button the first time will show the video status bar. Pressing a second time shows the file information for the video. Pressing the INFO button again shows the context information with operating instructions. The displayed information is hidden again by pressing again.

VIDEO PLAYER 'Flower Exhibition' Playtime: 02:13 (04:25) Languagesound Change size Jump to ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Video status bar - 3

END: Close displayed content.

Explanation of status bar symbols

The symbols (in the status bar top right) show you information about the current playback.

▶ Playback
II Pause
◀ Rewind (speed 2x, 5x, 10x, 20x)
▶ Fast-forward (speed 2x, 5x, 10x, 20x)

The bar behind the playtime shows you how far the video has been played.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 5

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 6

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 7

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 8

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 9

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 10

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 11

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 12

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 13

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 14

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 15

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 16

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 17

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of status bar symbols - 18

Media+

Wind

You can fast-forward/rewind videos to search for desired scenes.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Wind - 1

Rewind at double speed.

Speed 2x, 5x, 10x, 20x.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Wind - 2

Fast-forward at double speed.

Speed 2x, 5x, 10x, 20x.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Wind - 3

PLAY button: Continue playback.

In the case of Internet videos, please wait until these are buffered in the memory. This can take a few seconds, depending on the bit rate of the film and internet speed.

Jumping

You can jump to any point in the video by entering a time.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jumping - 1

Yellow button: opens jump to .....

VIDEO PLAYER "Flower Exhibidien" Playtime: 07:27:01 (04:26) Enter time... Cancel jump

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jumping - 3

Enter the desired time with the numeric buttons.

OK jumps to the time entered.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jumping - 4

Yellow button: cancels the jump.

Select language/sound

Video files can contain several audio tracks.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select language/sound - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select language/sound - 2

Red button: selects language/sound.

LANGUAGE/SOUND 130 129 128 131

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select language/sound - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Select language/sound - 5

▲ ▼ Highlight the desired sound or language and OK selects the audio track.

END: Cancels audio track selection.

Media+

HbbTV / MediaTek

HbbTV ^1 (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) offers the user extensive multimedia content, e.g. media libraries or additional information on the programme that is currently playing (if these are available from the current channel).

MediaText helps you to use the next generation of teletext/videotext for HbbTV.

MediaText/HbbTV text can either be started directly or through an HbbTV application.

Open HbbTV application

If an HbbTV application is available for the chosen channel after changing channels, this will be loaded during the automatic start process (see page 81) and a red button symbol will appear. When starting manually, the application will only be loaded by pressing the red button.

HbbTV is offered by the selected channel.
Connection to the Internet.
HbbTV mode is set to on.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Open HbbTV application - 1
Red button: Load / display HbbTV application.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Open HbbTV application - 2

The appearance, key assignment and available functions of the HbbTV applications are dependent on the provider. Under certain circumstances, the recording and bookmarking functions of the applications may not be supported.

Loewe takes no responsibility for the accessibility, functionality or content of HbbTV applications.

Hide / close HbbTV

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Hide / close HbbTV - 1

END: Hide / close HbbTV application.

Depending on the start behaviour set (see page 81), the HbbTV application will be hidden (automatically) or closed (manually). In the start behaviour automatically, you need to press the END button a second time for closure. You will see a screen message after closing.

Open HbbTV text directly

→ MediaTek/HbbTV text is offered by the selected channel.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Open HbbTV text directly - 1

TEXT: Open HbbTV text.

Pressing the TEXT button again opens the "standard" teletext/videotext (see page 50).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Open HbbTV text directly - 2

Navigation within the HbbTV text and how the coloured buttons are assigned can vary depending on the provider.

Leaving HbbTV mode/standard teletext

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Leaving HbbTV mode/standard teletext - 1

TEXT: Pressing the TEXT button again ends teletext.

Media+

HbbTV mode on/off

When the HbbTV mode is active (factory setting), additional services and further information (e.g. also from the Internet) can be viewed if these are offered by the current station.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - HbbTV mode on/off - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - HbbTV mode on/off - 2

SelectSettings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ SelectMiscellaneous,
▼ go to the menu line below.
▶ Select HbbTV mode,
▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Settings Miscellaneous Settings HbTV mode Start behaviour of HbTV stations Check integrated on ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 2

◀ ▶ Set the changes.

If the setting HbbTV mode → off has been selected, you can open the DR archive / video archive by pressing the red button.

Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations

If the setting HbbTV mode → on has been selected (see left column), you can specify if a available HbbTV application should be loaded automatically after the channel has been changed or if this should only occur manually after the red button has been pressed once. After loading the HbbTV application, an on screen instruction is displayed (depending on the channel that is being viewed).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations - 2

SelectSettings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
▶ Select Miscellaneous,
▼ go to the menu line below.

▶ Select Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations, OK open.

START BEHAVIOUR OF HBBTV STATI 1 Das Erste 13 arte HD 2 ZDF 14 ANIXE HD 3 RTL Television 15 Servus TV HD 4 SALT 16 Einstestival ... 5 ProSieben 17 ASTRA HD 6 VOX 18 Bayerisches ... 7 kabel eins 19 MDR Sachsen 8 arte 20 rob Berlin 9 RTL2 21 NDR ES NDS 10 Super RTL 22 WDR Köln 11 Das Erste HD 23 hr-femsehen 12 ZDF HD 24 SR Fernsehen Start automatically 15 Change whole list

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 5

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 6

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 7

Blue button: Change whole list / Change items individually.

Red button: Starts HbbTV on the selected channel Start automatically / Start all automatically.

Green button: Starts HbbTV on the selected channel Start manually / Start all manually.

Digital Recorder

About the Digital Recorder system

Using the Digital Recorder of your Loewe TV set you can record programmes onto the integrated hard disc (for TV sets with DR+), or onto an external hard disc connected via USB (USB Recording for TV sets without DR+).

The Digital Recorder can also process HDTV signals including the audio and auxiliary signals that they contain.

The various ways in which your Digital Recorder can be used are listed below.

The availability and operation of certain Digital Recorder functions are dependent on the type of equipment present (DR+ or USB Recording). Refer to the instructions on the individual pages for more information.

Overview of functions

Digital Recorder functionLoewe TV sets with integrated hard disc (DR+)Loewe TV sets without integrated hard disc (USB Recording)
Archive recording on the integrated hard disc-
Archive recording on the USB storage device (external hard disc) -
View other channels whilst the archive recording is taking place-
Archive playback from DR+-
Archive playback from USB storage devices (external hard disc)
Delay TV in live play mode (timeshift)-
Subsequent archive recording-
Delay TV when archive recording is running
View other channels with delay TV whilst the archive recording is taking place-
Copy recorded programmes onto an external recorder
Copy recorded programmes from DR+ onto a USB storage device-
Copy recorded programmes from one USB storage device to another
Permit recorded programmes to be viewed on the network-
View programmes that have been permitted to be viewed over the network
DR archive view with cover pictures-
Highlight replay-
Set/delete manual bookmarks
Hide parts of a recording-

● available

- not available

Digital Recorder

TV viewing with time shift

In the case of devices with an integrated hard disc, the Digital Recorder records the TV programme you are currently watching in the background if DR continuous mode is switched on in the Digital Recorder menu (factory setting).

Time-shifted operation is perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent for programmes of stations working with CI Plus encoding (see page 107).

- Time shift

You can stop a TV programme at any time and continue playing it later with a time shift. The maximum time shift is up to 3 hours. The recording starts again from the beginning and the old content is deleted every time you switch stations.

• Fast navigation by jumping

You can wind and rewind during a film at just the press of a button. The jump distance is adjustable.

The Smart Jump function also ensures that the jump width is halved each time the jump direction is changed or doubled after three jumps in the same direction (max. 8 minutes). This way you can quickly find a certain spot of the recording.

- Fast forward and rewind

You can fast forward and rewind at three different speeds in the programme you are viewing with time shift.

- Slow motion

You can play a programme which you are watching with a time offset at four different slow motion speeds.

- Subsequent archive recording (1)

When viewing a time-shift TV programme, you can archive the whole programme to the digital recorder's archive.

- Setting bookmarks

During a football match, for example, you can flag goals or exciting scenes. For this, the time shift recording is converted into an archive recording. At a later viewing you can replay bookmarked sections of a film as highlights. 30 seconds before and after the set bookmark are played.

- Replay function

When, for example, you are watching live football, you can, at the touch of a button, rewind by 40 seconds and replay a scene. You see the live picture at the same time in a PIP picture (not for HDTV broadcasts).

Digital Recorder archive

You can record movies you want to watch later in the Digital Recorder's archive.

Recordings of CI Plus encoded programmes are perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent (see page 107).

If EPG or teletext data are available, the Digital Recorder stores the title and additional information about each programme in the archive.

If additional languages are being transmitted for a DVB broadcast, these are also recorded. DVB subtitles or teletext subtitles are recorded if the recording of subtitles has been activated in the Digital Recorder settings. Display language selection and subtitles as in TV mode.

Start playback of your recordings from the archive.

If bookmarks were set in a recording, these entries are marked accordingly (▶). You can start playback so that the bookmarks are played as highlights (see page 100).

Comfortably select your favourite programme for recording from the EPG or teletext and watch the programmes later from the Digital Recorder's archive.

An automatic Delete Manager always ensures there is sufficient recording space for new movies (see page 94).

- Sort titles

You can have the broadcasts displayed according to time, alphabetically or by station name. You can therefore quickly find the recording you want to watch.

- Rename/edit titles

You can change the title of a programme in the archive, if necessary.

- Parental lock

Protect your archive against unauthorised access by using the parental lock feature.

- Delete protection

Set the delete protection for a movie to prevent it from being deleted automatically by the Delete Manager (see page 94).

- Copy

Using time control, copy films from the archive of the digital recorder to the external DVD recorder or onto external hard discs.

Digital Recorder

Archive recording

To record encoded programmes, please also read the instructions on pages 106 and 107.

You can watch another programme ^1 or playback a recorded programme ^1 from the archive when recording a TV programme into the archive. You can also play the same programme you are currently recording with a time shift.

- Immediate recording

Record interesting programmes directly into the DR archive with the RECORD button. When viewing time-shift broadcasts (see page 83) the current broadcast can be saved to the DR archive. The programme is recorded from the beginning to the end of the time offset recording or to the end of the set recording time.

• Timer-controlled recording

Comfortably select your favourite programme for recording, from the EPG or teletext. The timer overview has room for 50 entries. Watch the programmes later from the Digital Recorder's archive.

- Serial recording

You can conveniently programme series broadcast with alternating start times.

In some broadcast networks (like UK FreeView) you can even let the TV set record series and split events automatically depending on the information provided by the broadcaster. A conflict manager (see page 14) will also automatically try to find alternate instances of conflicting recordings if signalled by the broadcaster (e.g. UK FreePlay).

• Time shift viewing with archive recording

If you have programmed recording and come home before it is finished, you can watch the movie with a time shift while the rest is still being recorded.

Archive playback

All the recorded programmes can be selected in the archive and played. During archive playback, another programme can be recorded into the archive.

- Fast forward and rewind

There are three different speeds for winding and rewinding films.

- Fast navigation by jumping

You can fast forward and rewind during a film at the touch of a button. The jump width is adjustable (see page 85).

The Smart Jump function also ensures that the jump width is halved each time the jump direction is changed or doubled after three jumps in the same direction (max. 8 minutes). This way you can quickly find a certain spot of the recording.

- Slow motion

You can use playback at four different slow motion speeds.

- Bookmarks

To find interesting scenes in a movie later, you can manually set the bookmarks. In addition, there are also automatically set bookmarks every time a broadcast is changed. You can jump to each of the bookmarks in succession at the press of a button.

- Playing highlights

For recordings with manually set bookmarks you can limit the playback only to the highlights. You then see the scenes 30 seconds before and after each set bookmark. If there is more than one bookmark the highlights are played one after the other.

- Cut/Hide functions

Unwanted sections at the beginning and ending of a recording are easy to delete. Set hiding marks ^1 around uninteresting sections to watch a movie without interruptions or to archive it on DVD.

• Copying your recordings

You should burn recordings that you want to save permanently on DVD or copy them on an external USB hard disc. Afterwards, you can delete the recording from the archive.

- Copying recordings, which originate from a CI Plus encoded station, is perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent (see page 107).

Technical information

Switching off the TV set with the mains switch during operation or an inadvertent disruption to the power supply (e.g. power failure) can cause damage to the hard disc file system and hence loss of the recorded broadcasts. Always first switch your TV set to standby mode (press On/Off button on the remote control or switch-off button in the middle of the operating eye on the TV set), before switching off at the mains switch. Do not disconnect the USB storage device ^12 from the TV set under any circumstances whilst it is being recorded onto or whilst it is being copied onto.

However, if unexpected problems occur when operating the hard disc, formatting the hard disc may rectify this. Refer to the instructions on page 105. Also follow the information for formatting on page 105 when using an external USB disc

^(1) only for TV sets with DR ^+ .

^12 only for TV sets without DR ^+ .

Digital Recorder

Settings

You can make a few settings in the Digital Recorder menu to adapt the Digital Recorder to your requirements.

Call Digital Recorder menu

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call Digital Recorder menu - 1

Call DR archive / Video archive.
DR ARCHIVE Top-Movie 1 15.09. Soy Cinema HD Bon(n) Jour Berlin 14.09. Phoenix da capo 31.08. Das Erste Tagesschau 29.07. Sea. Individual 05.00. LOCEWE. 09:45 - 10:00 free capacity 68:42 hrs Detail View Edit project Delete copy Change Sorting Timer list

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call Digital Recorder menu - 3
MENU: Call Digital Recorder menu.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call Digital Recorder menu - 4

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call Digital Recorder menu - 5

DIGITAL RECORDER MENU Select memory medium DR continuous operation Recording qual Integrated hard disk ...

◀ ▶ Choose a setting,
▼ switch to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Set or enter using the numeric buttons of the remote control.

Explanation of the setting facilities

Select memory Select the storage medium whose accessible content is medium to be displayed in the archive.

The menu item only appears if several storage devices are available (for external hard discs and TV devices that are capable of permitting DR archive programmes to be viewed on the network, see page 103 onwards).

DR continuous If DR continuous mode is switched on, the programme operation ^(1) being watched is recorded permanently in the background. Factory setting: on.

Recording Adjust the recording quality for recording analogue pro-quality programmes. This results in a change in the recording capacity. Factory setting: high.

Explanation of the setting facilities (continue)

DR archive Display DR archive entries with or without covers. view ^(1) For determining covers, see page 102. Factory setting: With cover pictures.

If you watch the broadcast during recording (e.g. for direct recording), a cover will automatically be adopted. A broadcast whose recording is running completely in the background is initially saved without a cover.

Inform about If an entry has been hidden in an archive recording (see hidden page 97), you can be informed by a screen message sections when skipping a hidden area. Factory setting: yes.

Jump distanceSet the standard jump width (in minutes) used for jumping forwards or backwards in the film by pressing ◀ or ▶. Use the numeric buttons on the remote control to enter the time (always two-digit for 01 to 15 min.). Factory setting: 04 min.

If Smart Jump is activated, the jump width can only be set between 1 and 4 minutes.

Smart Jump Activate or deactivate Smart Jump function (see page 87). Factory setting: yes.

Serial A broadcast programmed with the recording type Serial recording is recorded only if it begins within the programmed start tolerance time ± series recording tolerance. Use the numeric buttons on the remote control to enter the time (always two-digit for 01 to 60 min).

Factory setting: +-30 min.

Serial recording tolerance is ignored when recording a programme with auto time control (see page 93).

RecordSelect here whether subtitles are to be recorded in subtitles at DR continuous operation for DVB stations. continuous Factory setting: no ^2 . operation ^(1)

Descrambling at The TV set can possibly already record decoded pro-DR continuous programmes in DR-continuous operation that have been watched as time-shifted encoded programmes. Recording the programme directly into the DR archive saves you having to descramble it later. Factory setting: no ^3 .

DR+ Streaming See page 86. settings

^(1) only for TV sets with DR ^+ .
^12 for location of TV set DK, FIN, N or S: yes.
^3 for location of TV set NL: yes.

Digital Recorder

Setting the pre-record and post-record time

You can set a pre-record and post-record time for timer recordings made without VPS (analogue) or auto time control (DVB) (see also page 106). This minimizes the risk that a part of the broadcast is not recorded due to the broadcast starting earlier and/or finishing later.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting the pre-record and post-record time - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting the pre-record and post-record time - 2

◄ ► Choose Recording,
▼ switch to the menu line below.

PRE-RECORD TIME If you record a programme without VPS, you can enter a time span here specifying how long before the scheduled time your programmed recording should start so that programmes which begin too early are recorded in full. TV MENU Recording Pre-record time 00 min (0 - 15) Post-record time Recording wizardist

◀ ▶ Set pre-record or post-record time,
▼ switch to the menu line below.

Enter the time using the numeric buttons (always 2-digit: 01 to 15 mins for pre-record time; 01 to 60 mins for post-record time). Factory setting: pre-record: 00 min, post-record: 05 min.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 2

DR+ Streaming settings

DR+ STREAMING SETTINGS Share the DR archive with other TVs yes Using the DR archives of other TVs yes DR device name LOEWE TV DR device group name Home IP port number 17123 DR standby 2 hrs

Share the DR Enter here whether recorded broadcasts within your TV archive with set's DR archive are to be accessible for viewing from other TVs ^1 other TV sets (server function).

Using the DR Setting yes enables you, via the archive, to also view archives of recordings from other TV sets that have accessible films other TVs within the home network (client function).

DR device Give your TV set a unique name for quick identification name ^1 in DR+Streaming.

DR device Give a name for your TV set group. group name Using different group names enables you to group your TV sets as required. Only TV sets under the same group name can exchange data.

IP port IP port numbers are preset ex-factory. Under normal number circumstances they do not require amending.

DR standby ^1 Set here how long your TV set is to continue to give access to films after calling DR+ Streaming within the MediaPortal (refer also to the operating instructions of the TV set). This stand-by period is also activated as soon as data exchange to another TV set has been completed.

Digital Recorder

TV viewing with time shift

The Digital Recorder continuous operation (only for TV sets with DR+) is switched on as the factory default setting (see page 85). In this case, the TV broadcast that you wish to view is automatically recorded in the background. The maximum time shift is up to 3 hours.

Please also read the instructions on watching time-shifted television on page 83.
Programmes with copy protection (e.g. Macrovision) cannot be watched with a time shift for legal reasons.

Interrupt

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Interrupt - 1

Press PAUSE button.
45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin 09:56 9:45 10:00 DR archive Language: Follow me

The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR status display appears.

At the top you will see the number and name of the station if EPG or teletext data are available, in addition to the start and end of the current programme and the title of the programme.

On the left hand side of the bar you can see the start time for time shift recording. On the right hand side of the bar you can see the time at which the time shift recorder will be full (automatically extends by 30 minutes, up to a max. 3 hours). The bar shows the amount of available recording capacity already used. The time displayed inside the bar is the time at which the Pause button was pressed.

Continue ( time shift viewing)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Continue ( time shift viewing) - 1

Press PLAY button.
45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin 09:56 00 Bookmark → Language/sound Bookmark → Stereo 2

You can now watch the TV programme with a time shift from the time you pressed the PAUSE button. The Playback symbol ▶ appears in place of the Pause symbol II.

Jump to automatically set bookmarks

With time-shift television, and with the status display showing, you can skip to automatically set bookmarks or to the start or end of the current recording. White bookmarks mark the beginnings and endings of broadcasts.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jump to automatically set bookmarks - 1

Red button: Jump back

Blue button: Jump forwards

Switch to live picture

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switch to live picture - 1

Press STOP button.

You see the station's live picture again.

Jumping

You can jump during time shift viewing by briefly pressing the buttons ◀ in the jump distance set; this enables you to skip uninteresting sections quickly.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jumping - 1

▶ Jump forwards.

45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin 09:45 10:00 09:58 Stereo 42 DR archive Language/sound Bookmark

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jumping - 3

◀ Jump backwards

45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin 99:56 10 Bookmark → Languagesound Bookmark → Stereo

SmartJump

If Smart Jump is activated, the jump width is halved every time you change the jump direction. The jump width is doubled if you jump more than three times in the same direction (max. 8 min.).

45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin 09:45 10 09:49 Stereo Bookmark Languagesound Bookmark

: Jump width corresponds to the jump width preset in the Digital Recorder menu.
: Jump width is less than preset in the Digital Recorder menu (e.g. after changing the jump direction).
: Jump width is greater than preset in the Digital Recorder menu (e.g. after jumping three times in the same direction).

For example, you are searching for the beginning of a broadcast that has already started.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - SmartJump - 2

◀ Press repeatedly to jump back.

If you have jumped past the beginning of the programme, jump in the opposite direction:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - SmartJump - 3

This jump in the opposite direction is only carried out for half the jump distance. Jump forward using ▶.

If you have jumped past the start of the programme:

Jump back again. In the process, the jump distance is cut in half again.

By halving the jump distance when changing direction again you can find your way to a specific place.

Digital Recorder

Fast forward and rewind

During time shift viewing you can fast forward and rewind at three different speeds. Sound is not audible during winding.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Fast forward and rewind - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Fast forward and rewind - 2

Press ◀ or ▶ for a little longer.

45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin Stereo 42 09:52 Languagesound

By briefly pressing ◀ or ▶, the speed will increase until you switch back to the first speed.

45. Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin Stereo 09:55 7 9 Language/hound

Playback begins automatically upon reaching the end of the recording. You are then about 10 seconds behind the live picture or when rewinding at the beginning of the time shift recording.

45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin 09:57 - 45 10:00 LanguageSound

Slowmotion

If Pause is active (freeze picture) you can play at four slow-motion speeds. Sound is not audible during slow motion. When viewing HDTV slow motion backwards is not possible.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slowmotion - 1

Press PAUSE button
45 Phoenix 09:43 10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin Stereo 2 09:49 DA archive language Follow me

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slowmotion - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slowmotion - 4

Press ◀ or ▶ briefly.

45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon/ni jour Berlin 09:49 Stereo Languagesound

Increase speed:

Press ◀ or ▶ several times briefly.

45 Phoenix 09:43-10:00 Bon(h) jour Berlin Stereo 09:57 LanguageSound

The speed increases every time you press the button until eventually switching back to the initial speed.

Highlightfunction

You can mark interesting scenes in sports reports for example to watch these again specially at a later viewing.

You can set bookmarks in time-shift TV or during live viewing.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Highlightfunction - 1

Press PLAY button for a little longer: Set bookmark.

The time shift recording that is already active in the background is converted into an archive recording. You will see a message on the screen. Every time the PLAY button is pressed down again a little longer, a new bookmark is set.

If there is no teletext or EPG programme information, the Recording duration menu will appear the first time you press the PLAY button. Select the desired recording duration and confirm using OK (see page 89).

Recordings which contain manual bookmarks can be replayed as highlights (see chapter Archive playback on pages 96 and 100).

Replayfunction

You can watch interesting scenes of sports reports again for example (only in live picture).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Replayfunction - 1

Press button
45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Ban(n) jour Berlin 09:15 10:00 Bookmark Languagesound Bookmark

The set jumps back 40 seconds into time shift mode. The playback flag is yellow (Smart Jump active).

At the same time, the live image is shown as a PIP small picture (not with HD stations).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Replayfunction - 3

Button ▶: Skip forwards 20 seconds.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Replayfunction - 4

PIP button: Close PIP picture, without quitting the time-shift playback.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Replayfunction - 5

STOP button: End replay function and return to live picture.

Switch to a different station

The time offset recording is restarted when you change stations. The previous time offset recording is deleted.

Digital Recorder

Archive recording – Direct recording

For recording encrypted broadcasts, please also refer to the information on pages 106 and 107.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Archive recording – Direct recording - 1

Press RECORD button briefly: Start direct recording. The Recording duration selection is called.

RECORDING DURATION (MIN.) current programme 30 60 90 120 180 240 ??? confirm

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Archive recording – Direct recording - 3

◀ ▶ Select desired recording time.

current programme: The broadcast being watched is adopted in the DR archive.

??? : Manually enter the recording duration with the numeric buttons of the remote control.

OK Confirm. Call Timer data.
TIMER DATA 09:45 Bon(n) jour Berlin AV Record Station 4 S Phoenix Date 05.02.2010 Recording time 09:45 until 10:00 Recording type once only confirm Parental lock Set delete protection

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Archive recording – Direct recording - 5

Check the timer data, change if necessary and confirm with OK. The recording is started.

See page 93 for explanations of the setting options in the Timer data menu.

One Touch Recording

With One Touch Recording, the recording starts immediately at the press of a button. You only need to specify the recording time. There is no need to select the recorder (e.g. DVD recorder). The programme is always recorded onto the integrated hard disc. The programme is always recorded onto the integrated hard disc ^1 or onto the USB storage device ^2 .

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - One Touch Recording - 1

Press RECORD button longer: Start One Touch Recording. The Recording duration selection is called.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - One Touch Recording - 2

▶ Select desired recording time, OK confirm.

When the start of the broadcast has been recorded, the broadcast will be adopted from the beginning (only when DR continuous operation is activated, see page 85). Otherwise, recording begins at the point from which viewing of the broadcast began.
With DR continuous mode activated (see page 85), you can also adopt a viewed and finished broadcast to the archive provided there has been no change of broadcast in between. Skip or wind to the desired broadcast and start the recording with current programme (see left column).

During the archive recording, the bar showing the recording progress is red and the REC message is shown for a current archive recording.

Scrambled programmes are recorded according to the presetting in the Digital Recorder menu → Descrambling at DR continuous operation. If yes is set, no other programme can be viewed during direct recording of a scrambled programme.
If the presetting in Descrambling at DR continuous operation is changed while you are watching a scrambled programme, the time offset recording is restarted. The previous recording is deleted.

D R

Setting bookmarks during archive recording

During immediate recording or a running timer recording, you can set bookmarks at interesting sections (press the PLAY button for a little longer). You will see a screen message. This enables you to find this part of the recording quickly during playback. You can set up to 15 bookmarks per recording.

Time shift viewing during archive recording

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Time shift viewing during archive recording - 1

PAUSE button: Change to freeze frame.

The recording is continued in the background.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Time shift viewing during archive recording - 2

PLAY button: Continue playback.

You will now see the time-shift archive recording.

Skipping, rapid winding and rewinding and slow motion function as described in the chapter TV viewing with time shift (pages 87 and 88).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Time shift viewing during archive recording - 3

STOP button: End time shift and return to the live image.

Digital Recorder

Watching other stations during archive recording

After you have started the recording, you can switch to another station ^1 .

The second channel can be watched in delay TV whilst a recording is taking place (Timeshift during archive recording, see also delay TV on page 87).
If an encrypted programme is recorded with the option Descrambled recording → yes, the CA module required for decoding is used for the recording. In this case you cannot watch any other encrypted programme.

Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording

After you have started the recording, you can also watch a programme you have already recorded.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording - 1

Call DR archive.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording - 2

Select

view film.

recording,

The recording process is continued in the background.

If an encrypted programme is recorded with the option Descrambled recording → yes, the CA module required for decoding is used for the recording. In this case you cannot watch any other encrypted programme from the archive.

Switching off the TV set during recording

You can switch off the TV to standby whilst recording. The recording is continued in the standby mode. The display on the set shows orange.
→ Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do not pull out the plug of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise the recording will be lost!

Subtitles

If subtitles are transmitted, these are recorded.
The recording of subtitles in DR continuous mode must be switched on in the Digital Recorder menu (see page 85).

Call subtitles in later playback:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Subtitles - 1

INFO: Show status display (see right column)

TEXT: Call subtitle selection.

▲▼ Select desired subtitles. OK Show subtitles.

Stop recording early

You can end a current archive recording prematurely.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Stop recording early - 1

Press STOP button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Stop recording early - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Stop recording early - 3

OK Stop recording.

The recording process is ended. The material recorded up to this point is saved on the hard disc and can be played back via the DR archive.

You can also end a running recording by deleting the entry in the timer overview or in the DR archive. See page 94 for further information.

Status display during time shift and archive recording

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Status display during time shift and archive recording - 1

INFO: Show status display.

Display with time shift ^(1) :

45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin Time shift: 01:00 min 09:45 10:0509 Bookmark ← Language → Bookmark → 09:52

Display with live picture during an archive recording:

45 Phoenix 09.45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin Live picture 09.45 09:52 10:05 Language/Sound 09:52

Display with time shift during an archive recording:

45 Phoenix 09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin Time shift: 01:00 min 09:45 10:0509:51 Bookmark - Language Bookmark - 09:52

Digital Recorder

Archive recording – Timer recording

For recording encrypted broadcasts, please also refer to the information on pages 106 and 107.

You can programme timer recordings for the Digital Recorder conveniently using the EPG, teletext or manually. Up to 50 simultaneous timer entries are possible.

When you have programmed timer recordings, the TV set can only be switched off to the standby mode. Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do not pull out the plug of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise no timer recordings can be made!

Programmed timers for the Digital Recorder are displayed in the timer overview.

The code DR→DR appears instead of the programme name in front of the entry for scrambled recordings still to be descrambled.

For an explanation of the symbols in the timer list see the chapter The direct way to record on page 122.

©
Call DR-archive.
DR ARCHIVE Top-Movie 1 15.08 Sky Cinema HD Bon(n) jour Berlin 14.08 Phoenix da capo 31.08 One Erste Tagesschau 28.07 Isot Individual 00.00 LOEWE 09:45 - 10:00 Detail View Editprotect Delete/copy Change turning

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Archive recording – Timer recording - 2
Red button: Call Timer list.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Archive recording – Timer recording - 3

A red dot with a key symbol appears in front of the entry for scrambled recordings still to be descrambled.

Programming a timer recording with the EPG

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording with the EPG - 1
Call EPG.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording with the EPG - 2

▲▼ Flag the broadcast to be recorded.
LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording with the EPG - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording with the EPG - 4
RECORD button: Programme the recording of a broadcast.

Timer data dialogue is opened.
TIMER DATA 09:45 Chamed - Zauberhafte Nexen R e c o r d e r D R AV Station 2.3 a r t e Date 05.02.2010 Recording time 15:57 until 16:59 Auto time control no Recording type once only Record subtitles no confirm Parental lock set delete protection

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording with the EPG - 6

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording with the EPG - 7
Check the timer data and change it if necessary.
OK Confirm timer data. The broadcast is entered into the timer overview.

See page 93 for explanations of the setting options in the Timer data menu.

In the EPG a red dot is set in front of the title of the programme. If a broadcast is already marked with a red dot, you can re-delete the programmed timer entry using the RECORD button. The red dot disappears.

Digital Recorder

Programming a timer recording via teletext

Call the station on which you want to make a timer recording.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording via teletext - 1

TEXT: Call teletext.

If HbbTV is offered by the channel, then the MediaTek/HbbTV text opens up (see page 80).

In this case, pressing the TEXT button again opens the "standard" teletext/videotext.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - TEXT: Call teletext. - 1

RECORD button: Call first programme preview page.

If not possible, define the preview page in the Teletext menu → Settings → Preview page.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - TEXT: Call teletext. - 2

Green button: Select the programme preview page which contains the programme which you want to record.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - TEXT: Call teletext. - 3

▶▲ Flag the time at which the broadcast starts.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - TEXT: Call teletext. - 4

OK Programme the recording of a broadcast.

TIMER DATA 17:15 Brisant R e c o r d e r D R AV Station Date 21 Das Erste 05.02.2010 Recording Time Recording type Record subities 17:15 until 17:45 once only no confirm Parental lock Set delete protection

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - TEXT: Call teletext. - 6

Check the timer data and change it if necessary.

Check the recording time and date for broadcasts which last past midnight or begin the following day. The data from the teletext may not be complete.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - TEXT: Call teletext. - 7

OK Confirm timer data. The broadcast is entered into the timer overview.

See page 93 for explanations of the setting options in the Timer data menu.

Programming a timer recording manually

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording manually - 1

Call DR-archive.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call DR-archive. - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call DR-archive. - 2

Red button: Call Timer list.

TIMER LIST Fri 05.02./08:41 Fri 05.02. 20:15:21:15 arte Sat 06.02 03:00:05:15 Sky G 08.02 17:30:18:00 RTL G 08.02 19:00-19:20 ZDF heute Tue 09.02. 20:15-22:25 3sat wissen spezial Aktuelle Nachrichten New entry Delete recording Change recording

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Red button: Call Timer list. - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Red button: Call Timer list. - 3

Red button: Call New entry.

SelectRecording

OK Call Recording wizard

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Call Recording wizard - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Call Recording wizard - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Call Recording wizard - 3

SelectManual

OK Start programming.

RECORDING WIZARD Please specify the station you want to record from. MANUAL Station selection HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV 0 VIDEO Das Erste ZDF WDR Köln Bayrisches F5 5 hr-femsehen 6 Phoenix 7 BR-alpha 8 3sar 9 EinsExtra 10 EinsFestival 11 EinsPlus 12 ZDFdokukanal 13 ZDFtheaterk... 14 arte 15 Sky Cinema HD 16 MDR Thuring... Proceed Select option Page 1 Sort alphabetically

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Start programming. - 2

▲▼◄► Select the station or connection socket to be recorded.

OK Accept.

The Timer Data menu is displayed.

TIMER DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * R e c o r d e r D R AV Station 15 Sky Cinema HD Date 05.02.2010 Recording time *+*+ until **-* Descrambled recording no Decoding overnight yes Recording type once only Record subtitles no ● coohm Parental lock ● Set delete protection

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - The Timer Data menu is displayed. - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - The Timer Data menu is displayed. - 3

Check the timer data. Enter the date and recording time in any case.

OK Confirm. The broadcast is entered into the timer overview.

Digital Recorder

If a DVD recorder was selected as a recording source, start playing the connected device manually from the beginning of the entered recording time.
For recording encrypted broadcasts, please also refer to the information on pages 106 and 107.

Explanations of the setting options in the Timer data menu

RecorderSelect the recorder that is to be used. Select DR here to select the Digital Recorder.
Station(only available when the selected station can be received via different signal sources, e.g. DVB-T and DVB-S)Select the signal source for the recording.
DateDate of recording.
Recording timeTime of the recording.
VPS(only available for some analogue stations, see also page 106).Use VPS data for analogue stations, yes / no.
Auto time control(only available for some DVB stations and when recording via EPG, see also page 106).Use automatic time control, yes / no.⇨ Auto time control must be set to yes to use UK FreeView+ functionality.
Descrambled recordingWhen recording scrambled stations, you can define here whether the station is to be descrambled during the recording, if possible. If you select yes, you cannot watch another coded station during recording because the CA module is used for the recording.Hint: Select yes if you do not want to watch another coded station during recording. You are then saved a subsequent descrambling.⇨ For a direct recording (page 89) the presetting is taken from the Digital Recorder menu → Descrambling at DR continuous operation (page 85).⇨ When recording from CI Plus scrambled programmes the auto time control cannot be used due to technical reasons, if here yes is chosen.

Explanations of the setting options in the Timer data menu (continued)

Decoding overnight(only with presetting Descrambled recording → no).If you choose the setting yes, the programme will be automatically decrypted at 02.00 the following day (CA module must be plugged in). Choose no if you would like the decryption to take place at another time. Enter the decryption time of your choosing with the remote control.
Programme provider PIN(only for recording CI Plus protected broadcasts)Enter the CA module's parental-lock PIN. Refer also to page 107.
Recording typeSelect once only, Mon-Fri, daily or weekly. For timer recordings via EPG Serial is available in addition.
Record subtitlesSelect whether broadcast subtitles are to be recorded too. ➔ For a direct recording (page 89) the presetting is taken from the Digital Recorder menu → Record subtitles at DR continuous operation (page 85).
Lock movieOnly allow later playback of this recording after entering the PIN number (child lock). Press green button. ➔ If a PIN still hasn't been entered under TV menu → Settings → Parental lock, the Parental lock will at first be activated.
Set delete protectionProtect against automatic deletion by the Delete Manager. Press yellow button.

Digital Recorder

Delete programmed timer entries

Use this function in the timer overview if you want to delete recordings already programmed or end a running timer recording.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete programmed timer entries - 1

Call DR-archive.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete programmed timer entries - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete programmed timer entries - 3

Red button: Call Timer list.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete programmed timer entries - 4

▲▼ Mark the timer to be deleted.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete programmed timer entries - 5

Yellow button: Delete timer entry.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete programmed timer entries - 6

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete programmed timer entries - 7

OK Confirm.

The letters of a timer currently active are red. If you delete this timer, the recording is stopped.

The Delete Manager

The Delete Manager always makes sure there is enough memory space on the hard disc for new recordings.

When the capacity of the hard disc is almost exhausted the old recordings are deleted.

Recordings which have been protected with a delete protection (see page 102) are not deleted by the Delete Manager. However, you can still delete these recordings manually.

To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important recordings to a rewritable DVD.

Delete the recordings from the Digital Recorder after copying.

Loewe is not liable for data loss from the Digital Recorder's hard disc.

Record conflict

If you wish to programme a new recording which overlaps an timer recording already saved, the Recording conflict dialogue will open. Here you define whether only one or both recordings are to be made.

If you decide for both, you have to state which of the two programmes is to be recorded fully.

Other ways of solving this recording conflict:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Record conflict - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Record conflict - 2

Green button: Change the timer data of the individual programmes.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Record conflict - 3

END: Reject new timer. The older timer entry is retained.

Digital Recorder

Archive playback

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Archive playback - 1

Call DR archive / Video archive.
DR ARCHIVE Top Movie 1 15.06 Sky Cinema HD Bon(n) Jour Berlin 14.00 Phoenix da Capo 31.08 Das Ense Tagesschau 28.07 Sept Individual 00.00 LOEWE 09:45 - 10:00 Detail View Highlights Timer Icon EditProtect DeleteCasey Change Sorting

The remaining free space on the storage device is shown at the top right-hand corner.

The specified free capacity is an estimated value. The exact remaining capacity of the hard disc depends on the broadcasts recorded in future and on the recording quality set in the case of analogue broadcasts (see page 85).

The progress bar shows you how much of the recording has been watched.

If other programme data is available from EPG or teletext these are shown below the archive list for the entry just flagged. Other information about the recording can be called with the TEXT button, if this is offered.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Archive playback - 3

Blue button: Change sorting of the recordings.

Green button: Sort recordings by date.

Yellow button: Sort recordings alphabetically.

Blue button: Sort recordings by station.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Archive playback - 4

Back to overview. The sorting last selected is retained.

Explanations of the symbols in the archive

00:17

Archive entry with active replay (page 98).
Archive entry with set parental lock (page 101).
Archive entry with set delete protection (page 102).
Archive entry with manually set bookmarks (see right column).
Coded archive entry.
CI+ CI Plus coded archive entry.
Archive entry is entered for transferring/copying in the timer overview (see page 98, Copying recordings to a connected recorder).
Archive entry is entered for descrambling in the timer overview (see page 99, Descramble scrambled recording).

Playing from the archive

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playing from the archive - 1

▲▼ Select the recording.

OK Start playback.

Archive 31.08. da capo 00:00 01 00:17 Bookmark → Repeat Highlights Languagebound Bookmark → Stereo 2

The CA module with Smart Card must be plugged in when playing recordings which are still coded.

Settingbookmarks

While playing an archive recording, you can set bookmarks.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Settingbookmarks - 1

PLAY button (press for a little longer): Set bookmark.

You will see a screen message. The drive display is then faded in and you will see the set bookmark above the bar for the playback. You can set up to 15 bookmarks per recording.

DO:42

Archive 31.08. da capo Stereo DO:00 01 bookmark + Repeats Highlights Languagesound Bookmark + Highlights Languagesound

Automatically set bookmarks are white. Manually set bookmarks are blue.

Jumpingtobookmarks

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jumpingtobookmarks - 1

INFO: Show status display.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jumpingtobookmarks - 2

Blue button: Skip to next bookmark.

Archive 31.08, da capo 00:00 01 Bookmark → Repeat Highlinks Languagesound Stereo 2 Bookmark →

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jumpingtobookmarks - 4

Red button: Skip to previous bookmark.

Archive 31.08. da capo 00:00:01 Rockmark Repeat Highlights Linguapersond Rockmark Stereo

Deleteindividualbookmarks

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleteindividualbookmarks - 1

Red or blue button: Jump to the manually set bookmark to be deleted.

Archive 31.08. da capo 00:00 01 Stereo Bookmark Repeat Highlights Languageground Bookmark

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleteindividualbookmarks - 3

Press PLAY button for a little longer: Delete bookmark.

Digital Recorder

When playing coded recordings, some of the following functions might only be possible with limitations.

Playinghighlights (1)

If there are manually set bookmarks in the current playback, they can be played as highlights. 30 seconds before and after the set bookmark are played. Highlights will be replayed sequentially according to the markings.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playinghighlights (1) - 1

INFO: Show status display.

Archive 31.08 do capo 00:00 00:00:17 Track name: Repeat Highlights Languagebound Track name:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playinghighlights (1) - 3

PLAY button: Replay Highlights

Archive 31.08 do capo DO:00 07:00:17 Highlight → Repeat Highlights stop Languagesound Highlight → Stereo 12 Highlight 1

As long as the status display is shown:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playinghighlights (1) - 5

Blue button: Jump to the next highlight.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playinghighlights (1) - 6

Red button: Jump to the previous highlight.

PLAY button: Jump to the next highlight (also possible without status display).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playinghighlights (1) - 7

STOP button: End highlight replay.

Further information concerning highlight playback can be found on page 100.

Jumping

By pressing button ◀ or ▶ you can skip through the broadcast.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jumping - 1

▶ Jump forwards.

Archive 31.08 da capo 00:00:00 00:13 Stereo 2 Benchmark > Highlighted Bookmark > Repeat Languagesound

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Jumping - 3

◀ Jump backwards.

Archive 31.08 do capo 00:00 0:00:17 Stereo Bookmark > Repeat Highlights Languagesound Bookmark >

Setting the jump distance: see page 85.

^1 only for TV sets with DR+.

GB - 96

SmartJump

Smart Jump allows you to search quickly for certain scenes of a recording. You will find more about this on page 87.

Fast forward and rewind

During time shift viewing you can fast forward and rewind at three different speeds. Sound is not audible during winding. You will find more about this on page 88.

Pause (freeze picture)

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Pause (freeze picture) - 1

PAUSE button: Switch to freeze picture.

Archive 31.08. da capo Stereo 00:11 06 archive Delete/hide Adopt as cover picture

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Pause (freeze picture) - 3

PLAY button: Continue playback.

Slowmotion

At an active pause (freeze frame) you can select from four slow motion speeds (for wind/rewind). There is no sound during slow motion replay.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slowmotion - 1

PAUSE button: Change to freeze frame

Archive 31.08. da capo Stereo DB archive DeleteBlade Adopt as cover picture

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slowmotion - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Slowmotion - 4

Press ▶ or ◀ briefly

Archive 31.08. da capo 00:00 07 00:17 pm Stereo 2

Increase speed:

Press button several times briefly.

Archive 31.08. da capo 00:00 01 00:17 Stereo 2

The speed increases every time you press the button until eventually switching back to the initial speed.

Digital Recorder

Deleting parts of the recording

You can delete sections of a recording from the current position within the film to the beginning or to the ending.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleting parts of the recording - 1

PAUSE button: During archive playback press at the point from which, to the start or to the end, the archive recording is to be deleted.

Archive 31.08 da capo 00:11 DR archive Deletefile must as cover picture

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleting parts of the recording - 3

Yellow button: Call Delete/hide.
Archive 31.08 da capo Stereo DO:00 01 00:52 Delete from here to start Delete from here to end Set Rolling Start Delete appearance

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleting parts of the recording - 5

Red button: Select Delete from here to start. Green button: Select Delete from here to end.
Archive 31.0B da capo 00:00 01 00:52 Confirm delete to end Assert delete

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleting parts of the recording - 7

OK Confirm delete.
Archive 31.08 da capo Stereo 12 00:17 00:00:00 DR archive Language sound

In this case, 11 min were deleted from the end of the broadcast so that the recording length is then just 52 min.

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleting parts of the recording - 9
Red or green button: Abort delete.

Hiding sections of the recording

You can hide sections of an archive recording. The hidden parts are skipped in the future playback and when copying to a connected recorder.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Hiding sections of the recording - 1

Press the PAUSE button at the point of the archive play-back where the hide is to begin.

Archive 31.08. do capo Stereo 60.11 96 archive Delete obupt as cover picture

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Hiding sections of the recording - 3

Yellow button: Call Delete/hide. Archive 31.08. da capo Stereo 2 00:00 01:00:52 Delete from here to start Delete from here to end Set hiding start Delete bookmark

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Hiding sections of the recording - 5

Yellow button: Set the start of the section to be hidden.
Archive 31.08. da capo 00:00 01 Stereo 2 Hide Set hiding end Cancel hiding

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Hiding sections of the recording - 7

PLAY button: Continue playback or
Archive 31.08. da capo Stereo 2 Hide 00:00 01 Set sliding end Cancel sliding

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Hiding sections of the recording - 9
◀◀ skip/wind to the point where the hide is to end.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Hiding sections of the recording - 10

Yellow button: Set hiding end. Archive 31.08. da capo Stereo 2 00:00 01 00:23 Bookmark Highlights Language/sound Bookmark

The hidden area of the recording is shown hatched in the bar. It will be skipped in future during playing.

If in the settings in the Digital Recorder menu → Inform about hidden sections → yes is set, you will see a screen message, if the hidden area has been reached during the playback.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Hiding sections of the recording - 12

Blue button during the screen message: Show hidden area again permanently.

Digital Recorder

Deletingbookmarks

You can globally delete all manually set bookmarks.

→ Manually set bookmarks are blue, automatically set bookmarks are displayed in white.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deletingbookmarks - 1

PAUSE button: Change to freeze picture.

Archive 31.08 do capo Stereo 00:11 DR archive Delete/Hi boost as cover picture

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deletingbookmarks - 3

Yellow button: Call Delete/hide.

Archive 31.08. da capo 00:00:01 00:52 Delete from here to start Delete from here to end Set finding start Delete mockwork

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deletingbookmarks - 5

Blue button: Delete manually set bookmarks.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deletingbookmarks - 6

PLAY button: Continue playback.

Archive 31.08 da capo Stereo 00:00 01 00:52 Bookwork + Bookwork +

Automatically set bookmarks are not deleted. In addition, you have the option of deleting the bookmarks via DR archive → Delete/copy (see page 100).

Repeat playback of recording

You can repeat recorded broadcasts and hence play them in an infinite loop.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Repeat playback of recording - 1

INFO: Show status display.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Repeat playback of recording - 2

Yellow button: Repeat film.

Archive 31.08 do capo 00:00:01 Stereu Bookmark ← Repeat off Highlights Languageground Bookmark ←

You will see a circular arrow on the left of the status display and in the archive after the name of the broadcast (see page 95). The function remains set for this broadcast even if the playback is interrupted.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Repeat playback of recording - 4

Yellow button: Switch off repeat function again.

Copying recordings to a connected recorder

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Copying recordings to a connected recorder - 1

Call archive.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Copying recordings to a connected recorder - 2

▼▲ Flag the recording to be copied.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Copying recordings to a connected recorder - 3

Yellow button: Call Delete/copy.

OR ARCHIVE Delete/copy Top-Movie 1 15.09 - Sky Cinema HD Bon(n) jour Berlin 14.09 - Phoenix da cape 31.06 - Das Erste Tagosschau 29.07 - Josal Individual 30.00 - LOFWE. 09:45 - 10:00 Detail Umark Mark all entries Delete bookmark Delete entry Copy entry free capacity 68%

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Copying recordings to a connected recorder - 5

▼▲ Select others if necessary and OK mark entry.

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Copying recordings to a connected recorder - 6

Red button: Mark all entries.

→ Titles to be copied are displayed in blue.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Copying recordings to a connected recorder - 7

Blue button: Call Copy entry

DR ARCHIVE Copy 14.09. Phoenix Bon(n) Jour Berlin Copy to ... AV DR Date 16.09.2009 Time 16:00-19:10 (76in) confirm

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Copying recordings to a connected recorder - 9

▶ SelectAV in the copy menu.

Should be copied over later, change date and time.

OK Confirm.

You will see the archive again. In front of the date of the recording(s) to be copied, you will now see a red point for the programmed copying.

The status of copying assignments in progress/pending can be seen in the timer overview

You cannot watch a DVB station whilst copying. The TV set can, however, be switched off to the standby mode. It is best to copy at night when the TV is not in use.

Digital Recorder

Copy recordings onto an external hard disc

You can also copy programmes onto a external hard disc, and archive them or make them available to other Loewe LCD TV sets (even those without DR+).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Copy recordings onto an external hard disc - 1

Call DR archive / Video archive.

Select titles that you want to transfer as described on page 98.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call DR archive / Video archive. - 1

Blue button: Call Copy entry.
DR ARCHIVE Copy 14.09. Phoenix Bon(n) jour Berlin Copy to ... USB1 AV confirm

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call DR archive / Video archive. - 3

▶ SelectUSBx in the Copy menu.

OK Start copying.

- Copying to an external hard disc takes place in the background and at a significantly higher speed. Contrary to copying recordings to a connected recorder (see page 98), there are no selection restrictions here regarding the stations. You see a screen message, when copying has finished.

The status of copying assignments in progress can be seen in the timer overview.

The TV set must not be switched off with the mains switch during the copying!

Delete programmed descrambling

You can delete a programmed descrambling of scrambled recordings at any time.

DR archive is displayed.

▼▲ Mark the desired programme (red dot with key symbol).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Delete programmed descrambling - 1

Yellow button: Call Delete/descramble.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Yellow button: Call Delete/descramble. - 1

Blue button: Cancel descrambling.

The red dot with key symbol and the entry in the timer list are deleted.

Descramblescrambledrecording

You can start descrambling scrambled recordings manually at any time ^1 . The CA module with the smart card must be inserted at the time of descrambling. Descrambling should be done as soon as possible because the probability that the code may become invalid increases with the time between recording and descrambling.

Proceed similarly to copying from the archive:

DR archive is displayed.
▼▲ Mark recording to be descrambled.
→ Scrambled recordings are marked by Ⓞ in front of the bar.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Descramblescrambledrecording - 1
Yellow button: Call Delete/copy.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Descramblescrambledrecording - 2

Blue button: Call Descramble entry.
DR ARCHIVE Descramble 15.09. Sky Cinema HD Top-Movie 1 Store at ... Integrated hard disk Date 16.09.2009 Time 03:00-05:15 (1:30min) confirm

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Descramblescrambledrecording - 4

Select Integrated hard diskUSBx ^4

Determine date and time of the descrambling.

OK Confirm.

You see the DR archive again. You will see a red dot with key symbol for the programmed descrambling in front of the date.

No other DVB station can be watched during descrambling. But the TV set can be switched off to standby mode. It is best to descramble at night when the TV is not in use.
You will find the recording descrambled in the DR archive after successful descrambling (without a 📄 before the bar).
The time and date of the descrambling can be changed subsequently in the timer list (see page 91).

Digital Recorder

Viewing highlights from the archive

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Viewing highlights from the archive - 1

Call DR archive
DR ARCHIVE Top-Movie 1 15.06 Soy Cinema HD Bon(n) jour Berlin 14.06 Phoenix da capo 31.08 Das Erste Tagesschau 28.07 Joes Individual 08.00 LOEWE 09:45 - 10:00 free capacity Detail View Highlights Timer Bit EditProject DeleteView Change Sorting

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Viewing highlights from the archive - 3

▶ Highlight recording with manually set bookmarks.
Recordings with manually set bookmarks are highlighted with ▶1.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Viewing highlights from the archive - 4

PLAY button: View Highlights

The highlights are played in sequence.

Deleting recordings from the archive

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleting recordings from the archive - 1

DR archive is displayed.
▼▲ Flag the recording to be deleted.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleting recordings from the archive - 2

Yellow button: Call Delete/copy.
DR ARCHIVE Delete/copy Top-Movie 1 10.08 Sky Cinema HC Bon(n) jour Berlin 14.08 Phoenix da capo 31.08 Das Erste Tagesschau 28.07 3sec Individual 00.00 LORWE 09:45 - 10:00 Detail Unmark Mark all entries Delete bookmark Delete entry Copy empty

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleting recordings from the archive - 4

▼ ▲ Select others if necessary and OK confirm.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deleting recordings from the archive - 5

Red button: Mark all entries.

Titles to be deleted are displayed in blue.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Red button: Mark all entries. - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Red button: Mark all entries. - 2

Yellow button: Call Delete entry.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Yellow button: Call Delete entry. - 1

OK Confir rm delete.

The recording(s) is/are deleted.

The DR archive is displayed again.

Deletebookmarks

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deletebookmarks - 1

DR archive is displayed.
▼▲ Select the recording for which you want to delete the bookmarks.
→ Recordings with manually set bookmarks are flagged with ▶ in front of the bar.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deletebookmarks - 2

Yellow button: Call delete/copy
DR ARCHIVE Delete/copy Top-Movie 1 12.00: Sky Cinema HD Bonin) Jour Berlin 14.00: Phoenix da capo 31.00: Das Erste Tagesschau 29.07: 3sat Individual 00.00: LOCKE. 09:45 - 10:00 Detail Unmark Mark all armies Delete bookmark Delete entry Copy entry

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deletebookmarks - 4

▼ ▲ Select others if necessary and OK confirm.

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deletebookmarks - 5

Red button: Mark all entries.

The selected titles are displayed in blue.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Deletebookmarks - 6

Green button: Delete bookmark.

All manually set bookmarks from the marked entries are deleted. Automatically set bookmarks are not deleted.

Digital Recorder

Changing the title of an archive

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changing the title of an archive - 1

DR archive is displayed.

▼▲ Select the title to be changed.

Green button: Call Edit/protect.
DR ARCHIVE Edit/protect free capacity Top-Movie 1 15.06 Sky Cinema HD Bon(n) jour Berlin 14.06 Phoenix da capo 31.06 Das Erste Tagesschau 28.07 State Individual 00.00 LOEWE 09:45 - 10:00 Detail Parental lock Set delete protection Rename

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changing the title of an archive - 3

Press the blue button for Rename.

Underneath the first letter of the title, you will see a line which indicates the current input position for the letter.

▶ Input position to the right.
Input position to the left.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changing the title of an archive - 4

In put the characters one after another (if entering using the number buttons on the remote control, use it as if it were a telephone keypad; see page 129 for the exact assignment of the buttons).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changing the title of an archive - 5

Yellow button: Delete character to the left of the cursor.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changing the title of an archive - 6

Green button: Switch between capital letters and small letters.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Changing the title of an archive - 7

OK Conclude the entry.

This saves the change permanently.

Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock)

You can lock movies that your children are not permitted to view, for instance. Viewing is then only possible if the PIN number has been entered beforehand.

DR archive is displayed.

Green button: Call Edit/protect.
LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock) - 1

▼ ▲ Mark the title that is to be locked.

DR ARCHIVE Edit/protect Top-Movie 1 15.09... Sky Cinema HD Bon(n) jour Berlin 14.09... Phoenix da capo 31.08... Das Este Tagesschau 29.07... Jsal Individual 00.00... LOEWE 09:45 - 10:00 Detail Parental lock Set delete protection Rename

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock) - 3

Green button: Call Parental lock.
PARENTAL LOCK Access code 4.0006 Please enter P/N

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock) - 5

Enter your access code with the numeric buttons of the remote control. If you define an access code for the first time, remember it well. Confirm the new access code with OK. The DR archive opens again.

Green button: Lock movie.

▲▼ Select others if necessary.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock) - 6

Green button: Lock movie or Unlock movie again.
DR ARCHIVE Eolit/protect free capacity 6 Top-Movie 1 13.09. Sky Cinema HD Bon(n) jour Berlin 14.09. Phoenix da capo 32.08. Das Einst Tagesschau 29.07. 3sat Individual 00:00. LOPEWF. 09:45 - 10:00 Detail Unlock movie Set delete protection Rename

A lock symbol 🔒 will be displayed before the bar in the case of locked films.

Digital Recorder

Viewing a locked movie

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Viewing a locked movie - 1

Call DR archive
DR ARCHIVE Top-Movie 1 15.00 Sky Cinema HD Bon(n) |our Berlin 14.00 Phoenix 31.00 Das Ernie Tagesschau 29.00 Steu Individual 05.00 LOCEWE The parental lock is active. Detail View Highlights Parental lock celetercopy Timer lic change saving

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Viewing a locked movie - 3

▼▲ Mark locked film, OK View film.

The covers of locked films cannot be read. The detailed information for the recording cannot be called up. The cover (for archive view with covers, see page 85) is replaced by a neutral image with a key symbol. In addition, the entry receives the symbol 🔒 at the end of the line.

The system requests you to enter your access code (PIN). After entering the access code the playback of the movie starts.

Determine cover picture ^1

You can display cover pictures for your recorded broadcasts in the DR archive (see page 85). The covers can be freely determined by you during an archive replay:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Determine cover picture ^1 - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Determine cover picture ^1 - 2

Jump / wind to the desired location in the recording.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Determine cover picture ^1 - 3

PAUSE button: Switch to freeze picture.
Archive 31.08. do capo 00:11 Stereo 02 DR archive Delete/Redoot as cover picture

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Determine cover picture ^1 - 5

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Determine cover picture ^1 - 6

Blue button: Adopt displayed freeze frame as cover picture.

The image will be displayed next to the broadcast in the DR archive in future (see also page 95).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Determine cover picture ^1 - 7

PLAY button: Continue playback.

^1 only for TV sets with DR ^+ .

GB-102

Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection

You can provide films with a delete protection to prevent an automatic deletion by the delete manager (see page 94).

DR archive is displayed.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 3

Green button: Call Edit/protect.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 4

▼ ▲ Select the title for which you want to set/cancel a delete protection.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 5

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 6

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 7

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 8

w button: Set/Cancel delete protection.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 9

▼ ▲ Select others if necessary.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 10

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 11

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setting/cancellingdeleteprotection - 12

Yellow button: Set/Cancel delete protection.

DR ARCHIVE Edit/protect Top-Movie 1 15.09... Sky Cinema HD Bon(n) Jour Berlin 14.09... Phoenix da capo 31.08... Das Este Tagesschau 29.07... 3sal Individual DO DO... LOEWE... 09:45 - 10:00 free capacity 6 Detail Parental lock Cancel delete protection Rename

The symbol 📋 appears in front of the bar when the delete protection is activated.

Digital Recorder

DR+ Streaming

You can make your DR archive entries accessible so that other Loewe TV sets can view them via the network. It is also possible to interrupt a current broadcast and "take it" to another TV set (Follow me function, see page 104).

To use DR+Streaming, at least two Loewe TV sets are required with SL 1xx chassis (at least one of which has an integrated Digital Recorder). The TV sets also need to be connected via a wireless connection (WLAN) or a cable connection (e.g. Ethernet, PowerLine).
DR Streaming must be activated in the DR+ Streaming settings (see below).
Archive entries can only be hosted or permitted to be viewed by TV sets with an integrated hard disc (DR+). Playback of archive entries that have been permitted to be viewed can take place on all TV sets with Chassis SL1xx (with or without DR+) on the network.
The following functions would require write access on the device that is permitting the programme to be viewed, and are therefore not available when viewing a DR archive entry over the network (see right column): child protection, delete protection, rename function, delete entry or bookmark, set bookmark, partial delete or hide of the recording.

DR+ Streaming settings

Prior to the first use of DR+ Streaming, a number of settings are required.

→ Digital Recorder menu is open (page 85).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - DR+ Streaming settings - 1

◀ ▶ Select DR+ Streaming settings, OK open settings options.

For explanations of the settings see page 86.

Play DR archive entry via network

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Play DR archive entry via network - 1

Call DR archive / Video archive.
DR ARCHIVE LOEWE TV free capacity UEFA Champions League - Qualifikation 20.08. Sat 3 Tagesschau 19.08. Das Erste HD heute 19.08. ZDF HD Tatort 29.07. 3sat Individual 00.00. LOEWE. 09:45 - 10:00 Detail View EditProtect Delete/copy Change sorting Timer list

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Play DR archive entry via network - 3

Select required TV set..

The name of the accessible TV set is shown in the second line (in this example: LOEWE TV).

▼ ▲ Mark the required archive entry, OK view archive entry.

See page 95 for further information.

Extended standby mode with DR+ Streaming access

Switching off the accessible TV set ends access to the DR archive. You can, however, place your TV set in an extended standby mode to enable access to the DR archive even when the TV set is switched off.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Extended standby mode with DR+ Streaming access - 1

MEDIA: Open MediaPortal.
MEDIA PORTAL TV DVB radio Interne Audio DR archive DR+ Streaming Media Source MediaNet Video podcasts RECOMMENDATIONS Focus TV ZO Online BR RADIO DELUXE LAUNGE RADIO 90of - Dcn Frasball Radio Kassik Radio Film

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Extended standby mode with DR+ Streaming access - 3

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select DR+ Streaming, OK call.

You will see a message on the screen. After approximately 20 seconds the TV set will enter extended standby mode. The DR archive will then be accessible within the network for the period of time set in the DR+Streaming settings (see page 86).

Digital Recorder

Copy recordings from an accessible TV set

You can copy archive entries from an accessible TV set via a network to the integrated hard disc, or to a storage medium connected to the TV set's USB.

At the target TV set:

Call DR archive.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Copy recordings from an accessible TV set - 1

Select required accessible TV set.

Select titles to be copied as described on page 98.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Copy recordings from an accessible TV set - 2

Blue button: Call Copy entry.
DR ARCHIVE Copy 14.09. Phoenix Bon(n) jour Berlin Copy to ... Integrated hard disk US81 content

If there are multiple storage mediums available, select the one required.

OK Start the copy procedure.

  • Copying to the integrated or external hard disc takes place in the background and at a significantly higher speed. Contrary to copying recordings to a connected recorder (see page 98), there are no selection restrictions here regarding the stations. You see a screen message, when copying has finished.
    The status of copying assignments in progress can be seen in the timer overview.
    During copying, neither the accessible TV set nor the target TV set may be disconnected from the mains! Copying will otherwise be interrupted and the recording may then be unusable.

Follow me function

The Follow me function enables you to interrupt a current broadcast and to continue viewing at an alternative TV set from the point of interruption.

DR continuous operation is activated (page 85).
Share the DR archive with other TVs (see page 86) is activated.
Using the DR archives of other TVs (see page 86) is activated at the target TV set.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Follow me function - 1

Press PAUSE button.
45 Phoenix 09:45 10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin Stereo 2 09:46 3:45 10:00 DR archive Language sound Follow me

The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR status display appears.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Follow me function - 3
Yellow button: Activate Follow me.

You will see a message on the screen. An archive recording starts in approximately 20 seconds. The broadcast is adopted into the DR archive. The set switches off automatically.

The recording TV set will make the broadcast available to the network from now. Open the DR archive / Video archive of the TV set on which you wish to view the broadcast. The broadcast appears in orange during the current recording.

OR ARCHIVE INDIVIDUAL 55 RA 2010 - Highlights 16.09 - ZOFHD Top-Movie 1 15.09 - Sky Cinema HD Bon(n) Jour Berlin 14.09 - Phoenix da capo 31.08 - Das Erste TagesxKtau 29.07 - Jbal Individual 00.00 - LOPWE. free capacity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + ( ) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + • + • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

To play accessible broadcasts on other TV sets, see page 103.

For further information on general operation see page 95.

Digital Recorder

Checking the hard disc

You can check the integrated hard disc of the TV set ^1 , e.g. if problems with the Digital Recorder function occur.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Checking the hard disc - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Checking the hard disc - 2

Call TV menu.

▶ Select Settings,
▼ switch to the menu line below.
Select Miscellaneous,
▼ switch to the menu line below.

▶ Select Check integrated hard disk, OK activate.

ATTENTION The hard disk check can be launched by pressing the confirmation key and can take up to 20 minutes? Start check No, cancel the operation

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call TV menu. - 2

Red button: Start check.

After the check, a message will appear on the screen showing the results of the check and tips on how to resolve any problems that are present, should there be any.

After the check, the TV set must be re-started.

Or: END: Cancel the operation.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Red button: Start check. - 1

Formatting the hard disc

If problems were detected when the hard disc was being tested (see left column), re-formatting may be able to remedy the problem. Additionally, you can re-format the hard disc in order to quickly and easily delete all the data stored on it.

Attention!

Formatting of the hard disk deletes all the data saved on it!

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Attention! - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Attention! - 2

Call TV menu.

Select Settings,
▼ switch to the menu line below.
▶ Select Miscellaneous,
▼ switch to the menu line below.

Select Format integrated hard disk ^(1) or Format external hard disk,

OK activate.

ATTENTION If the formatting of the hard disc is confirmed by pressing the button then the TV switches itself off and then back on, and the formatting of the herd disc starts automatically. Attention! This process will delete all data stored on the hard disc. Do you really want to format the hard disc? Start formatting No, cancel the operation

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call TV menu. - 2

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call TV menu. - 3

Red button: Start formatting.

→ After the formatting, the TV set must be re-started.

Or:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Red button: Start formatting. - 1

END: Cancel the operation.

Note on formatting external USB discs:

The TV set uses the hard disc file system FAT32. The file system NTFS is not supported. PCs with the operating system Microsoft Windows only support a total hard disc volume of 32GB when formatting on FAT32. Larger hard discs are automatically reduced in their capacity by this. Format external USB discs that you wish to use with the TV set as described above.

Digital Recorder

Further information

VPSandautomatictimecontrol

Your TV set can use the supporting technologies VPS (Video Programming System) and automatic time control for recording a broadcast.

VPS serves for monitoring the start and end time of the broadcast with analogue stations. The VPS time indication is compared by the digital recorder with the start time programmed by the user. If both times correspond the recording is started. However, VPS is not supported by all stations.

The automatic time control assumes the corresponding monitoring of the start and end time for DVB stations. The recording is started at the beginning of the broadcast and switched off at the end, even if the start and/or end time have been changed by the programme provider. Broadcast interruptions are also taken into account. However, the automatic time control is not supported by all stations.

DVB Common Interface standard (CI)

If a programme has been recorded coded, the decoding process is carried out automatically the next night in the standby mode (when timer data settings do not differ). Please note that the TV set may not be switched off at the mains overnight and that the CA module with SmartCard must be inserted in the CI slot of the TV set.

If the recording is not decoded fairly soon after decoding, it may not be possible to decode it at all. The longer the time between recording and decoding, the greater the probability that the code is no longer valid.

→ Scrambled hard disc recordings appear in the timer list until they are descrambled (page 91).
You can also start decoding manually (see page 99).
Your programme provider may not support later (time offset) descrambling.

You can have programmes from scrambled stations descrambled already in DR continuous mode. This saves you having to decode directly recorded scrambled programmes later. An appropriate CA module with SmartCard must be inserted in the TV set's CI slot for this.

The playback of encrypted programmes is strongly dependent on which CA module is used. The playback of encrypted recordings may sometimes not be possible, or only to a limited extent.
Hint: When possible, record unencrypted programmes or unencrypt them as soon as possible.

Selection possibilities in the CA module menu and performance capability of your CA module depend on the type of module used and the installed software. Consult the manufacturer of the module if you have any questions.

Digital Recorder

DVB Common Interface Plus standard (CI Plus)

CI Plus is an advanced development of the DVB Common Interface Standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible to the previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as the programme provider permits this.

The regulations of the past standards (see page 27) likewise apply to CI Plus. There are however further additional regulations.

Programme providers, who use the CI Plus standard, can assign different rights for their broadcast programmes. For instance, the programme provider can restrict or completely prevent recording or later watching of an encoded programme. If there are such regulations, these also apply to time-shifted watching of television programmes.

A screen message informs you of this fact, if you would like to record such a programme. Recording is carried out in such a case (an appropriate entry is displayed in the DR archive), later watching of the programme is however not possible at all or only for a limited period (e.g. 10 days).

A possible time limitation of the playback will also appear in the corresponding entry in the DR archive.

The provider can also prohibit later decoding of a recorded encoded programme.

All restrictions mentioned here are the responsibilities of the broadcaster. The TV simply values the broadcaster set signalling as neutral.

Furthermore, the programme provider can prevent external copying of protected programmes, e.g. on a DVD recorder (also after possible decoding).

It could be necessary to enter the parental protection PIN of the CA module when programming the data, if you want to record a CI Plus protected programme, which has been protected against viewing by minors. The secret number of the TV set is required for watching the programme later.

The appearance of the CA module menu of CI Plus can deviate from the normal appearance of the TV menu.

Software update for CI Plus capable CA modules

Every now and then, there will be new system software for your CA module software. There are two software update types.

Recommended update:

Information on an available update is displayed. You can either run this or cancel the procedure. If you do not install the update, the information will reappear in regular intervals until the update has been installed.

Forced update:

Information on an available update is displayed. The module does not decode any more until the update has been successfully implemented.

Troubleshooting (CA module)

The following information can help, if problems should occur when running a CA module:

Switch the TV set off to the standby mode. Remove the CA module from the TV set. Switch the TV set off completely. Wait a few seconds. Reinsert the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.

If errors continue to occur, make a note of the displayed two-digit error code (only for CI Plus capable CA modules). Contact your technical customer service. You will find the service addresses on page 154.

External devices

Connections menu

Settings for the connection of external appliances are made in this menu.

Calling the connections menu

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Calling the connections menu - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Calling the connections menu - 2

SelectConnections,
▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Connections Sound components Antenna DVB AV connecting settings Miscel

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 2

Select the desired setting.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Connections menu:

Sound components The sound components wizard helps you to configure the components which are used to reproduce the TV sound. You will find a description of the sound components wizard on page 115.

Antenna DVB Here you can set the parameters of the DVB-T and the DVB-S ^1 antenna with the antenna wizard. The setting options of the DVB antennas are described in the first time operation routine (from page 22).

AV connecting settings See right column for explanations.

Miscellaneous See page 109 for explanations.

AV connection settings

In the AV connection settings menu the parameters for the AV and AVS connection sockets can be adapted.

Calling AV connection settings

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Calling AV connection settings - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 1

▶ SelectConnections,
▼ go to the menu line below.
▶ SelectAV connecting settings,
▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Connections AV connecting settings Device at connection AV AV standard Signal type Allow switch

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 3

▶ Select the desired setting.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the AV connecting settings menu:

Device at Indicate here whether a set and, if yes, which one is con-connection AV nected to the AV socket.

AV standard You set the AV standard of the connected appliance to AV or AVS here.

Normally you leave the setting on Automatic. If the standard of the connected appliance is not detected automatically, select the right standard.

Ask your dealer or consult the operating manual of the connected appliance if necessary.

Signal type You set the signal type of the device connected to AV or AVS here. Normally, you should leave the setting at Automatic; otherwise select a suitable signal type. You can find out more from your dealer.

Allow switching voltage If this function is activated and you switch an AV device (not at AVS) that outputs a switching voltage to playback, its picture and sound will be played immediately on all TV station slots.

External devices

Connections – Miscellaneous

Various settings (e.g. Digital Link, Decoder etc.) in connection with external appliances are made in this menu.

Calling up other settings for connections

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Calling up other settings for connections - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 1

SelectConnections,
▼ go to the menu line below.
▶ SelectMiscellaneous,
▼ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Connections Miscellaneous Digital Link Plus Start transmission Decoder stations Remote TV switch on via Dig

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 3

▶ Select the desired setting.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Miscellaneous menu:

Digital Link Plus

With this function the station data of the TV set can be transmitted to a connected Digital Link Plus capable recorder. Only the station data of analogue TV stations can be transmitted.

Decoder stations

Here you can identify analogue stations with encoded content as decoder stations and set the mode of the sound encoding of encoded audio signals, so that these are automatically decoded by a decoder connected to AV. Menu item only available if a Decoder has been selected as Device at connection AV (see page 108).

Remote TV switch on via Digital Link

Here you can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from Standby mode, if a tape/disc is to be played or a screen menu displayed from Digital Link HD or Digital Link Plus-enabled devices which are connected to HDMI or AV inputs (see also page 110 and 112).

Assign digital audio input

You can assign the digital audio input socket (AUDIO DIGITAL IN) to an AV input (AV, HDMI, PC IN etc.) here (see page 121).

Gaming mode

Here you can set a faster display of your activities on the screen for various inputs of the TV set, e.g. for games consoles (see right hand column).

Gaming mode

For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles, PC applications or even Karaoke machines are operated, we recommend you to activate the Gaming mode. Your activities are then displayed quicker on the screen by reducing the complex picture improving techniques. This mode can be set separately for every input of your TV set.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Gaming mode - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 1

SelectConnections,
▼ go to the menu line below.
Select Miscellaneous,
▼ go to the menu line below.

◀ ▶ Select Gaming mode, OK call.

SET GAMING MODE FOR INPUTS ... HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV VIDEO ● Gaming mode on/off

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 3

▲▼ Select socket, OK Gaming mode for selected socket on/off.

You can recognise AV connections with set Gaming mode by the symbol ☑ after the connection name.

Switching Games mode on/off via the status display

You can also switch the Games mode for the selected AV input on and off via the status display.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Switching Games mode on/off via the status display - 1

Call AV selection.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call AV selection. - 1

▲▼ Select desired connection, OK switch over.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call AV selection. - 2

INFO: Call up status display (if this is no longer shown after switching to the AV connection).

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call AV selection. - 3

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Call AV selection. - 4

Green button: Switch Gaming mode for selected connected on or off according to status.

External devices

Devices to the connections AV/AVS

An additional appliance such as a DVD player, VCR/DVD recorder etc. can be connected to the TV set at the Euro-AV socket AV (see page 11).

The AV input AVS (see page 11) offers the possibility of connecting a digital camera or a Camcorder for example.

The AV sockets can process different signal types. Which signal type your accessory device provides can be found in the operating manual of the appropriate device.

Owing to the large number of AV devices available on the market, we can only mention a few examples for the connection of accessory equipment to the AV sockets here.

If the sound of the device connected to an AV socket is to be transmitted digitally, a cinch cable must be plugged between the coaxial digital output of the accessory equipment and the AUDIO DIGITAL IN socket of the TV set. In addition, the digital audio input must be assigned to the appropriate AV socket.

The digital audio input can be assigned to the appropriate AV socket by the TV menu → Connections → Miscellaneous → Assign digital audio input (see page 121).

You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a Digital Link Plus-enabled device connected to AV.

You can find the settings in the TV Menu under Connections → Other → Remote TV switch on via Digital Link (see also page 109).

Connecting a DVD player to the TV set

A DVD player has been selected in the TV Menu under Connections → AV connecting settings → Device at connection AV (see also page 108).

Switch off all equipment before connecting.

Connect the Euro-AV output of the DVD player to the AV socket of the TV set.

Use a fully equipped Euro-AV cable (available from your dealer) for this.

DVD player AV TV set AV

Connection example of a DVD player

Playback from AV device

If the device at AV supports the Digital Link Plus functionality or if in the TV menu → Connections → AV connecting settings → Allow switching voltage → yes, the TV set will automatically switch to the corresponding AV input after starting the replay at the AV device.

The AV input can also be called manually, however.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback from AV device - 1

Call AV selection.
AV SELECTION HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV VIDEO Switch to ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback from AV device - 3
▲▼ Select AV,
OK switch over.

Start playback on the connected device.

External devices

Connecting a DVD recorder to the TV set

A DVD recorder has been selected in the TV Menu under Connections → AV connecting settings → Device at connection AV (see also page 108). Switch off all equipment before connecting.

Connect the Euro-AV output of the DVD recorder to the AV socket of the TV set.

Use a fully equipped Euro-AV cable (available from your dealer) for this. If you want to receive and record analogue stations with the receiver (tuner) built into the recorder, the recorder must be looped into the aerial cable.

Connect the DVD recorder as shown in the connection example below.

R TV DVD recorder ANT IN AV ANT OUT TV set AV ANT TV

Connection example of a DVD recorder

If you want to record DVB stations with an external recorder, the internal receiver of the TV set must be used (see Timer recording with external devices on page 124).

Playback from AV device

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback from AV device - 1

Call AV selection.
AV SELECTION HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV VIDEO Switch to ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback from AV device - 3

▲▼ Select AV, OK switch over.

Start playback on the connected device.

Connecting Camcorder/camera

Switch off all equipment before connecting.

Connect the AV output of the camcorder to the sound input sockets AUDIO IN L (white) and AUDIO IN R (red) and the AVS connection of the side AV sockets of the TV set.

Use the AV cable enclosed with the camcorder for this.

Some camcorders only supply an FBAS signal instead of an S-Video signal at the AV output. In this case use the VIDEO IN input (yellow).

TV set Camcorder AUDIO IN L/R AVS Connection example of a camcorder

If your camcorder has an HDMI output, you can also connect the appliance via the HDMI socket HDMI3 on the side (see connections page 11 or Devices to the HDMI connections page 112).

Playback from AV device

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback from AV device - 1

Call AV selection.
AV SELECTION HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV VIDEO © Switch to ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback from AV device - 3

▲▼ Select AVS, OK switch over.

Start playback on the connected device.

External devices

Devices to the HDMI connections

The HDMI connections (High Definition Multimedia Interface) allow the transmission of digital video and audio signals from a player (e.g. DVD player, DVD recorder, Blu-ray player, game console or Set-Top-Box) via a single cable.

The digital video and audio data are transmitted without data compression digitally and therefore lose none of their quality.

A maximum of five devices can be connected in cascade to every HDMI socket. The devices are arranged in the AV menu and in the station list below the appropriate HDMI socket. If the respective device sends its own device name, this appears in place of the connection name.

Your TV set can show 24p films, which are output from a connected HDMI player (e.g. Loewe BluTech Vision Interactive) optimally (see glossary, page 144).

Digital video signals from a DVI player can be also be reproduced by the HDMI connection using a DVI/HDMI adapter cable. The sound must be piped in additionally. However, the sound must then be supplied additionally. HDMI and DVI both use the same copy protection method HDCP.

Connecting the device

Switch off all equipment before connecting.

Connect the device by an HDMI cable (Type A, 19-pole) to one of the HDMI sockets of the TV set.

An HDMI device is connected to the side HDMI socket (e.g. camcorder) in the same way as shown in the figure.

Blu-ray player HDMI HDMI1 TV set

Connection example of an HDMI device (e.g. Blu-ray Player)

If a DVI/HDMI adapter cable is used, the corresponding sound can be piped through the AUDIO IN (analogue) or AUDIO DIGITAL IN (digital) socket on the TV set (see also page 121).

Playback from the device

If the device at HDMI supports the Digital Link HD functionality, the TV set will automatically switch to the corresponding HDMI input after starting the replay at the HDMI device.

The HDMI input can also be called up manually:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback from the device - 1

Call AV selection.
AV SELECTION HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV VIDEO Switch to ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback from the device - 3
▲▼ Select HDMI socket.
With Digital Link HD-capable devices the device name may possibly appear in place of the connection name.
OK Switch over.
Start playback on the connected HDMI device. The best possible format for the picture is detected and set automatically.

You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a Digital Link HD-enabled device connected to HDMI1 or HDMI2.

You can find the settings in the TV Menu under Connections → Other → Remote TV switch on via Digital Link (see also page 109).

External devices

Adjust Geometry (only possible with certain signals)

This allows you to shift the picture (horizontally and vertically) so that it fills the entire screen.

When connecting a PC to an HDMI socket of the TV set, set the output signal at your PC beforehand so that it corresponds to one of the signals in the table on page 135.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Adjust Geometry (only possible with certain signals) - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Adjust Geometry (only possible with certain signals) - 2

◀ ▶ SelectPicture,
▼ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Selectmore ..., OK call.

◀ ▶ SelectPC IN display,

▼ go to the menu line below.

MENU TV Picture PC IN display Picture horizontal 66 Picture vertical

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 2

Select the desired setting,
▼ go to the menu line below.
Make settings.

The Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) system operation allows Loewe television sets to transmit the remote control signals via the HDMI connection of a TV set to compatible HDMI devices, such as e.g. Loewe AudioVision. You can therefore set up a concealed CEC capable HDMI device.

Concealed installation of HDMI devices

For this, first assign the HDMI CEC function with Code 22 to the required device button (REC, DVD or AUDIO) as described on page 125.

Now assign the Digital Link HD function to the used HDMI device.

Assign HDMI device

The CEC capable HDMI device is connected to one of the HDMI sockets of the TV set and switched on.

REC DVD AUDIO Press required button for 5 seconds.

A selection menu appears on the TV set.

HINT Here you select the device which you want to switch over your remote control to with the 📄️ key. After confirming the selection with OK all remote control commands are passed on to the selected device via the TV set in future when you press this key. SELECT HDMI DEVICE FOR KEY AUDIO AudioVision No device Adopt

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Assign HDMI device - 2

▲▼ Select required device from the list. OK Adopt.

From now on, the commands of the remote control are communicated from the TV set to the HDMI device, if the corresponding device button (REC, DVD or AUDIO) has been pressed previously.

External devices

Devices to the PC IN connection

You can connect a PC to the PC IN socket for example and thus use the TV screen as a monitor.

When connecting a PCs or accessory device to the PC IN socket of the TV set, set the output signal on your PC first so that it matches one of the signals in the table on page 135.

Connecting the device

Switch off all equipment before connecting.

Connect the device to the TV set's PC IN socket with a VGA cable.

Connect the analogue audio signal of the PC to the AUDIO IN jack on the TV set with a stereo cable.

PC VGAAUDIO TV set PC IN AUDIO IN

Connection example of a PC

Alternatively, connect the digital audio output of the PC or accessory equipment to the AUDIO DIGITAL IN socket of the TV set with a cinch cable.

The digital audio input can be assigned to the PC IN socket by TV menu → Connections → Miscellaneous → Assign digital audio input (see page 121).

If your PC has an HDMI interface, you can also connect the PC via the HDMI socket to your TV set (see page 112).

Depending on the version of the HDMI connection on the PC, the audio signal is also transmitted via the HDMI connection.

If this is not the case, connect the analogue or digital sound as described above. See the appropriate operating manual for further information about the version of the HDMI interface on your PC.

Playback from the device

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback from the device - 1

Call AV selection.
AV SELECTION HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 PC IN AVS AV VIDEO Switch to ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Playback from the device - 3
▲▼ Select PC IN socket, OK switch over.

PC picture adjustment (only possible with certain signals)

In this menu you can set the position (vertical, horizontal) and the phase length of your PC.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - PC picture adjustment (only possible with certain signals) - 1
MENU: Call TV menu.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - PC picture adjustment (only possible with certain signals) - 2
▶ SelectPicture, ▶ go to the menu line below.
◀ ▶ Selectmore ..., OK call.
▶ SelectPC IN display, ▶ go to the menu line below.

TV MENU Picture PC IN display Picture horizontal Picture vertical Phase position 66

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - PC picture adjustment (only possible with certain signals) - 4
◀ ▶ Select the desired setting, ▼ go to the menu line below. ◀ ▶ Make settings.

External devices

Sound components wizard

The sound components wizard helps you to configure the components that are used to reproduce the TV sound. For sound reproduction, you can configure the TV loudspeakers, active loudspeakers, loudspeaker systems, Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL ^1 as well as analogue and digital HiFi/AV amplifiers.

TV sets that are equipped with an integrated digital multi-channel audio decoder can output sound signals with up to six channels (5.1 surround sound) via the AUDIO LINK interface irrespective of whether the sound signal comes from an external device (DVD player, Blu-ray player) or from a DVB station.

For settings for loudspeaker systems and active speakers at the AUDIO LINK interface of the TV set, see page 116 onwards.

For sound formats supported by the digital audio decoder, see page 135.

Sound reproduction in TV sets with an integrated digital multi-channel audio decoder

SOUND COMPONENTS Sound playback via ... TV speakers Speaker system HIF/AV amplifier Sound projector HIF/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable) Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable) © End of wizard

TV speakers Sound reproduction via the built-in TV speakers (factory setting).

Speaker system Sound reproduction via a loudspeaker system or active loudspeakers (see page 116).

HiFi/AV Sound reproduction via an external analogue or digital amplifier audio amplifier (see page 120).

Sound Sound reproduction via a sound projector, e.g. Loewe projector ^(1) Individual Sound Projector SL. For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the sound projector.

HiFi/AV- Sound reproduction optionally via an external analogue amplifier or TV or digital audio amplifier (see page 120) or via the built-speakers in TV loudspeakers. The sound reproduction can be changed using the button ▶.

Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable) ^(1) Sound reproduction optionally via a sound projector or via the built-in TV loudspeakers. The sound reproduction can be changed using the button ▶.

^1 Only with retrofitted serial interface (RJ12) (see page 121 and equipment and upgrade possibilities on page 140).

External devices

Connecting Loewe sound system

Setup

The arrangement of speakers and TV set can look like the illustration below:

The front and surround speakers should be installed symmetrically to the TV set and to your sitting position.

You can place the subwoofer anywhere on the floor. We recommend placing it in front asymmetrically next to the TV set.

If a centre speaker is used, it should be placed centrally below the TV set.

For the settings in the sound components wizard enter the distances of the centre speaker, and the front and surround speakers to your sitting position. This guarantees a natural spatial image of the sound.

Front left TV speakers as center Front right Subwoofer Surround left Surround right

Installation example for a Loewe sound system

Connecting

Switch off all devices before connecting.

Subwoofer with AUDIO LINK interface (see connection diagram):

The subwoofer is connected to the TV set via the AUDIO LINK interface.

Use the AUDIO LINK cable provided with the subwoofer.

TV set AUDIO LINK cable Subwoofer Line In AudioLink Left Subo Right Left Right Speaker Out Left Left Right Left Left Right Left Left Right Left Left Right Left Left Right Left Left Right Left Left Right

Connection Loewe sound system (Subwoofer) to the TV set

Subwoofer without AUDIO LINK interface (not illustrated):

Plug the adapter cable to the AUDIO LINK interface of the TV set. Connect the cinch connections of the adapter cable to the 6-pin cinch connections of the subwoofer.

The cubic plug cable connects the master connection on the subwoofer to the cubic plug of the adapter cable.

The adapter and cubic plug cable are available from your dealer (see Accessories, page 139).

External devices

Connecting active loudspeakers

If you want to use another similar speaker system or active speakers, you can connect these to the AUDIO LINK interface of the TV set with an adapter cable.

A comparable speaker system is connected in a similar way to that described above for "subwoofer without AUDIO LINK interface".

The adapter cable is available from your dealer (see Accessories, page 139).

Connecting active speakers

Switch off all devices before connecting.

Plug the adapter cable into the AUDIO LINK interface of the TV set. Connect the cinch connections of the adapter cable to the connections of the corresponding active speakers.

The cinch connections of the adapter cable are labelled:

R for Front right SR for Surround right

L for Front left SL for Surround left

C for Centre SUB for Subwoofer

The connections on the adapter cable are preamplifier outputs. Therefore, only active speakers may be connected directly to the adapter cable.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Connecting active speakers - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Front left"] --> B["Adapter cable"]
    C["Centre"] --> B
    D["Subwoofer"] --> B
    E["Front right"] --> B
    F["Surround left"] --> B
    G["Surround right"] --> B
    H["TV set"] --> I["Adapter cable"]
    J["Adapter cable"] --> K["TV set"]
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Connection of active speakers to the TV set

Adjusting the speaker system

Calling the sound components wizard

→ In normal TV mode, without other displays.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Adjusting the speaker system - 1

MENU: Call TV menu.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Adjusting the speaker system - 2

SelectConnections

▼ go to the menu line below.

▶ SelectSound components,

OK calls the sound components wizard.

SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your TV sound. If you select a "Speaker system", this must be connected to the AUDIO LINK socket on the back of the TV set (with an additional adapter if necessary). If your TV has no built-in speakers, the sections relating to "TV-speakers" may not be selected. SOUND COMPONENTS Sound playback via ... TV speakers Speaker system HIFI/AV amplifier Sound projector HIFI/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable) Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable)

Sound playback via ... speakers system

Enter here that you want to hear the TV sound over a speaker system. If you connect active speakers, please use the setting Speaker system.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Sound playback via ... speakers system - 1

▼ ▲ MarkSpeaker system,

OK to continue.

SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD Please specify whether you want to change the illustrated setting of your speaker system or whether all existing settings are to be reset to the values of the delivery state. Components 90Hz Distances 4.0m 4.0m Level 0dB 0dB SOUND COMPONENTS Speaker system Configuration/modification → Reset to factory settings Process

If nothing has been set yet, the factory settings or otherwise the last set values are displayed.

continued on the next page →

External devices

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - External devices - 1

If you want to set up or change a speaker system:

▶ SelectConfiguration/modification, OK call selection.

SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD Please specify here whether you want to completely reconfigure a speaker system or whether you want to limit the configuration to changing the speaker connections, the speaker distances from the listening position or the individual speaker levels in relation to each other. SOUND COMPONENTS Configuration/modification of speaker system Complete Connections only Distances only Levels only Select

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - External devices - 3

▼ ▲ SelectComplete, OK continue to connect and set the front speakers.

SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD Please specify here whether you want to connect external front speakers. In this case, their lower limit frequency must be entered in Hz (see instruction manual and technical data of the speakers). 40Hz 40Hz Sound COMPONENTS Connect front speakers External speakers TV speak 40 Hz Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - External devices - 5

◀ ▶ Select External speakers or TV speakers,

▼ go to the menu line below and

set the lower limit frequency of the external front speakers in 10 Hz steps.

SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD Please specify here whether you want to connect external front speakers. In this case, their lower limit frequency must be entered in Hz (see instruction manual and technical data of the speakers). 90Hz 90Hz SOUND COMPONENTS Connect front speakers External speakers 90 Hz Proceed

Select the start value of the frequency response of the speakers for the right setting (e.g. 50Hz for the specification "Frequency response 50-20.000Hz"). See the technical data of the speakers for the value.
→ You can replace the external front speakers by the TV speakers if necessary. In this case, select TV speakers. Then transmit the sound of the front speakers.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - External devices - 7

OK continue to connect and set the surround speakers.

▶ Select yes for external speakers.
If no surround speakers are connected, these can be simulated using the front and centre speakers.
- Go to the menu line below and
set the lower limit frequency of the surround speakers in 10 Hz steps.
→ Select the start value of the frequency response of the speakers for the right setting.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - External devices - 8

OK continue to connect and set the centre speaker.

Select whether the TV speakers or an External speaker is to reproduce the centre sound or no if no centre speaker is connected.
Select whether the TV speakers or an External speaker is to reproduce the centre sound or no if no centre speaker is connected.
If no centre speaker is connected, the front speakers also transmit the centre sound parts additionally.
for External speakers or TV speakers go to the menu line below and
set the lower limit frequency of the centre speaker in 10 Hz steps.
Select the start value of the frequency response of the speakers for the right setting.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - External devices - 9

OK continue to connect the Subwoofer.

◀ ▶ yes is the selection for subwoofer.
If no subwoofer is connected, the front speakers additionally transmit the sound parts intended for the subwoofer as far as possible.

External devices

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - External devices - 1

OK continue to set the Distance to left front speaker.

Measure the distances from your listening position to the front, surround, and centre speakers respectively. The digital audio decoder calculates delay times from this for the loudspeaker signals, so that these reach the listener simultaneously.

SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD Please enter the distance of the left front speaker from your listening position here. 4.2m 4.0m 7m 1.0m 0.9m SOUND COMPONENTS Distance to left front speaker 2 m Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK continue to set the Distance to left front speaker. - 2

Set the distance between the left front speaker and your listening position in 10 cm steps.

OK continue respectively to the other speakers and ◀ ▶ adjust the distance.

After setting the distance for the centre speaker ...

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK continue to set the Distance to left front speaker. - 3

OK continue to Adjust speaker level.

SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD You hear a sound from every speaker one after another. But you can also select the speakers manually with the menu control buttons up/down. Set the volume for the respectively active speaker shown in blue so that you get approximately the same volume impression from all the speakers. Sound COMPONENTS Adjust speaker level: 0 dB Proceed Precedingheat loudspeaker

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK continue to Adjust speaker level. - 2

▶ Adjust the volume for each speaker.
▼ ▲ Select speakers manually.
For balanced audio reproduction all speakers should be set at the same volume level. A noise signal will be reproduced automatically on each speaker in succession. Adjust every speaker to equal perceived volume from your listening position.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK continue to Adjust speaker level. - 3

OK continue to Subwoofer phase.

SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD Here you can reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Test both values in music reproduction and then select the one with which you get a better bass reproduction. SOUND COMPONENTS Subwoofer phase 0° 180° End of sweep

Switch to a station with music with P+/P− or start playback with music on a DVD player.

Test both values (0° and 180°) and select the one with which you get a clearer bass reproduction from your listening position.

OK to confirm the setting and exit the wizard.

This ends the sound components wizard for connecting and setting up a speakers system.

External devices

Connecting audio amplifiers

The sound components wizard permits configuration of different audio amplifiers (stereo amplifiers, surround amplifiers, analogue or digital) with different digital audio formats (Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG, and stereo/PCM). See the operating manual of the audio amplifier for more information.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Connecting audio amplifiers - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu - 1

Select Connections,

go to the menu line below.

Select Sound components.

OK calls the sound components wizard

SOUND COMPONENTS Sound playback via ... TV speakers Speaker system HIF/AV amplifier Sound projector HIF/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable) Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable) Proceed

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu - 3

▼▲ Mark the HiFi/AV amplifier.

OK Proceed.

Select whether the sound is to be transmitted digitally or analogue to the amplifier. Continue, depending on the amplifier, see right column.

Explanations of the setting possibilities:

Settings for the sound projector: See operating manual of the sound projector.

HiFi/AV Select setting when an amplifier is connected and the TV amplifier speakers are not used.

HiFi/AV Select setting when an amplifier is connected and the TV amplifier or TV speakers are used. The sound can be switched between the amplifier and the TV speakers in the listen mode (switchable) selection.

Sound Specify sound formats which can be decoded with the digital formats amplifier (see operating manual of the used amplifier).

Type of Select either stereo or surround amplifier. amplifier

TV loudsp. as centre speaker For every connected surround amplifier, select whether the TV loudspeakers are to be used as centre speaker. If so, establish a connection between the centre output of the amplifier and the centre input of the TV set CENTER IN with a cinch cable.

Attention: Do not use the centre speaker connection of the amplifier, use the centre pre-amp output instead!

Connecting digital audio amplifiers

Continuation of the left column above ...

For digital audio transmission: Select yes.

Connect the digital audio output of the TV set AUDIO DIGITAL OUT with the digital audio input of the amplifier via a cinch cable:

Digital amplifier DIGITAL IN TV set AUDIO DIGITAL OUT

Sound formats, amplifier type and other settings, see explanations of the setting possibilities (left hand column).

Connecting analogue audio amplifiers

Continuation of the left column above ...

For digital audio transmission: Select no.

Connect the analogue audio output of the TV set to the analogue audio input of the amplifier with a stereo cinch cable with the AUDIO LINK adapter cable (see accessories on page 139):

Analogue amplifier AUX IN L R TV set SR SL SUB C R L AUDIO LINK

For selecting the amplifier type and making other settings, see explanations of the setting possibilities (left hand column).

External devices

Assignment of the digital audio input

In order to be able to hear the digital sound of an external device connected to an AV input, an AV input can be assigned to the digital audio input socket AUDIO DIGITAL IN. By switching to this AV input, the digital audio signal at the AUDIO DIGITAL IN input is communicated to the integral digital multi-channel audio decoder and the digital audio output socket AUDIO DIGITAL OUT. You will then hear the digital sound of the assigned AV input instead of the analogue sound if available.

Connecting devices to the digital audio input

For the digital audio playback from an external device, e.g. the DVD player, you have to feed the digital audio signal to the TV set.

The external digital audio signal can be reproduced via the digital multi-channel audio decoder integrated in the TV set, via an externally connected digital audio amplifier or via a Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL ^[1] .

If an external audio amplifier or Loewe Individual Sound Projector is used, this must be registered in the sound components wizard (see page 120).

Select Connections,
▼ go to the menu line below.
Select Miscellaneous,
▼ go to the menu line below.

◀ ▶ Select Assign digital audio input,

▼ go to the menu line below.

◀ ▶ Select AV input.

TV MENU Connections Miscellaneous Assign digital audio input no to AV to AVS to HDMI1 to HDMI2 to F

To connect a DVD player to the digital audio input of the TV set for example, connect the digital output socket of the DVD player (DIGITAL OUT) via a cinch cable to the AUDIO DIGITAL IN socket on the TV set.

Connection example for a DVD player, see right hand column.

DVD player DIGITAL OUT AV TV set AV AUDIO DIGITAL IN

Audio connection in HDMI/DVI devices

External devices with DVI connection

If an external device with DVI interface is connected via a HDMI/DVI adapter to one of the HDMI sockets of the TV set, you can connect the digital sound of the external device to the digital audio input socket AUDIO DIGITAL IN.

The assignment of the digital audio input to the corresponding HDMI socket of the TV set takes place as described in the column on the left. If you want to use the analogue sound of the external device, connect it to the AUDIO IN socket.

External devices with HDMI connection

If external devices with an HDMI interface are connected to one of the HDMI sockets of the TV set, no assignment of the audio input is necessary because the digital transmission of picture and sound takes place via a single connection in HDMI.

Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12)

You can connect either the Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL or a home network system of different manufacturers (e.g. AMX, Crestron) to your TV set via the upgradable RS-232C (RJ12) interface.

Please consult your dealer for configuration of the RS-232C (RJ12) interface and further information about the different home networking systems.

External devices

The direct way to record

You can programme timer recordings via the integrated Digital Recorder (if installed) or connected recorders on the TV set. The recording wizard is integrated at several places for programming a recording. You will find further information on recording with the digital recorder from page 89 onwards.

Programming a timer recording with the EPG

You are in EPG mode; if not, press the EPG button.

EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE) MON 01.03. Date Time Station Topics Mon 01.03./16:05 now + until 17.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 all all arte 15:57-16:59 Charmed - Zauberhafte Hexen Das Erste 16:00-16:10 Tagesschau ZDF 16:00-16:10 heute - in Europa WDR Köln 16:00-16:15 WDR aktuell Bayerisches... 16:00-16:05 Rundschau hr-fernsehen 16:00-16:30 Schlemmerreise Spanien MDR FERNs... 16:00-16:15 Hier ab vier NDR FS HH 16:00-16:30 Tipps und Trends - Der Verbraucher... SWR Fernse... 16:00-16:05 Baden-Württemberg aktuell Charmed - Zauberhafte Hexen Detail Page 11 View Recording Select time Select data, ... topics

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording with the EPG - 2

▼ ▲ Mark the desired broadcast.

RECORD button: Call Timer data (see right hand column).

Programming a timer recording via teletext

You are using the teletext mode; or if not, press the TEXT button. If HbbTV text opens instead of the standard teletext (see page 80), press the TEXT button again.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording via teletext - 1

RECORD button: Call the programme pages of the current station.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording via teletext - 2

Green button: Go to the appropriate page.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming a timer recording via teletext - 3

▼▲ Select desired broadcast, OK calls Timer data (see right hand column).

Entering the Timer data

After selecting the station you wish to record, timer data will be displayed.

The setting options for the timer data differ depending on the recorder selection, whether an analogue or DVB station is to be recorded or via which route (EPG, Teletext) the recording has been programmed.

TIMER DATA 17:15 Brisant R e c o r d e r A V Station 01 Das Erste D a t e 2 2 . 0 1 . 1 0 Recording time 17:15 until 17:45 Auto time control no Recording type once only • confirm

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Entering the Timer data - 2

▲▼◄► Change Timer data if required or, OK confirm.

Setting possibilities in the Timer data menu:

Recorder Selection of the recorder used (AV, DR ^3 ).

Date Day of recording.

Recording time Time of recording.

VPS Use VPS data for analogue stations, yes/no ^(1) .

Descrambled If recording encoded stations ^3 you can define here whether recording the station is to be encoded during the recording, if possible.

Decoding If you choose the setting yes, the programme will be overnight automatically decrypted at 02.00 the following day ^① (CA module must be plugged in).

Programme Here you can indicate the PIN of the programme provider provider PIN for your CI plus CA module in order to enable decrypted recording ^3 of a station protected with parental control.

Auto time Use automatic time control, yes/no ^2 .

control The recording is performed precisely at the time, even if the beginning/end time of the programme provider has changed.

Recording type Select once only, Mo–Fri, daily, weekly or Serial ^(2)(3) .

Record Select whether broadcast subtitles are to be recorded ^(3) . subtitles

^1 only available with some analogue stations.
^12 only available when recording via EPG.
^13 only for devices with an integrated hard disc (DR+) or a connected external hard disc (USB recording), see page 89 onwards.

External devices

Programming the timer with the timer overview

All programmed recordings, marked programmes and copy orders ^1 are listed in the timer overview. You can also programme new recordings, mark other programmes and copy ^1 pre-recorded programmes from the DR archive to an external recorder with the timer overview.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Programming the timer with the timer overview - 1

Green button: Change recording.

Yellow button: Delete recording.

Blue button: Delete memo.

Explanation of the symbols in the timer list:

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Explanation of the symbols in the timer list: - 1

Record

Repeated recording (daily, weekly or Mon-Fri)

Serial recording

Decoding order (later decoding of an encrypted recorded programme ^(1) )

√ Marked programme (see page 48)

only for devices with an integrated hard disc (DR+) or a connected external hard disc (USB recording), see page 89 onwards..

New entry: Programme timer recording manually

→ Timer list is opened.

Red button: Call New timer entry. NEW TIMER ENTRY Recording Memo Copy OK Select Recording, OK call. RECORDING WIZARD Via EPG Via teletext Manual OK Select Manual. For programming a timer recording Via EPG or Via Teletext see page 122.

OK Call Station selection.

◀ ▶ ▲ ▼ Select station.

OK Call Timer data.

Entry of the timer data see page 122.

After confirming the timer data the new recording is transferred to the timer overview.

New entry: Memorize programme using the timer overview

→ Timer list is opened.

Red button: Call New timer entry. NEW TIMER ENTRY Ordering Memo Copy Rec OK Select Memo. OK EPG is opened.

Note desired programme as described in Switching and memorizing with the programme list (Seite 48).

New entry: Copying DR archive entries ^(1)

Timer list is opened.
→ An external recorder is registered.

Red button: Call New timer entry. NEW TIMER ENTRY Termo Copy Recording Vormor OK Select Copy. OK The DR archive is opened.

See the chapter Copying recordings in the operating instructions of the Digital Recorder for further steps.

External devices

Timer recording with external devices

The recording of HDTV stations with external devices is only possible to a limited degree. The HD transmission is scaled down to SD quality and output at the AV output for the recording.

If you use an externally connected recorder with Digital Link Plus or a similar system, the TV set and connected recorder exchange data (e.g. compare station lists TV set/recorder or timer data of analogue stations). Please consult the operating manual of your recorder to find out of your recorder is Digital Link Plus compatible. In addition use only Euro-AV cables for the connection between TV set and recorder.

Analogue stations

The timer data are transmitted automatically from the TV set to the recorder after programming is complete. (For DVD recorders in addition the recording quality SQ or EQ is also transmitted.) The recording is then controlled by the recorder and the recorder tuner is used for reception of the programme.

The recording data are not saved in the timer overview of the TV set. Consequently if you want to change or delete the timer data then you must do so on the recorder.

Digital stations

If you want to record digital stations with an externally connected recorder, then the DVB tuner is used and the TV device takes over control of the recorder. Then the station on the TV set is locked during the timer recording.

It is not possible to switch over to another DVB station.

If using devices with DVB-T/C Twin-Tuner (Equipment variants see page 140), analogue stations can be viewed on the TV set parallel to the recording with the external device.

Copyprotection

Copy-protected programmes will not be output on the EURO AV sockets for legal reasons.

External devices

Operating Loewe equipment

Using the remote control for the TV mode of the TV set

Press the TV button, the display above it will light for approx. 5 seconds.

Using the remote control for a Loewe recorder

REC Press the REC button, the display above it will light for approx. 5 seconds.

Using the remote control for a Loewe player

Press the DVD button, the display above it will light for approx. 5 seconds.

Using the remote control for the radio mode of the TV set

AudiO Press the AUDIO button, the display above it will light for approx. 5 seconds.

As long as a button is pressed, the display of the selected operating mode lights up (TV - REC - DVD - AUDIO). This allows you to check which operating mode the remote control is set to every time you press a button.

The factory setting of the buttons is described above (see also table in right hand column). The assignment of the buttons can be changed to suit the existing accessory devices (see right hand column).

Setting the remote control for other Loewe devices

You can operate various Loewe devices with the remote control. The device keys REC - DVD - AUDIO can be reassigned to operate various Loewe devices.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Operating Loewe equipment - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Operating Loewe equipment - 2

Press the required device buttons and the Stop button simultaneously for 5 sec. until the corresponding LED display flashes twice.

Then enter the two-digit device code from the list below.

Device Code Factory setting
Loewe ViewVision 8106 H 10
Loewe Viewvision, Centros 21x2 12
Loewe ViewVision DR+ DVB-T 13 REC
Loewe Auro 2216 PS/8116 DT 14
Loewe BluTech Vision15
Loewe Soundprojector17
Loewe TV - Digital radio19AUDIO
Loewe Mediacenter20
Loewe BluTech Vision Interactive21DVD
HDMI CEC mode22
Loewe AudioVision24
Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL25
Apple IR codes26
Apple IR codes (Apple TV-2G)27
Resetting to factory setting99

The associated LED display flashes twice.

The codes shown here only apply for direct operation of the accessory device. For operation of the connected accessory device via the TV set, e.g. with concealed installation (Code 22), see page 113. The remote control's signal is transmitted from the TV set to the accessory device with concealed installation.

Software update

Basic information

It is possible to update the software on your TV set. Current software versions can be downloaded from the Loewe Internet site and installed on your set using a USB stick.

USB stick

Requirements of USB stick

USB sticks tested by Loewe and compatible in type and format can be ordered from the Loewe dealer using the article no. 90456.900.

If you would like to use your own USB stick, please follow these tips/conditions:

  • Formatting in FAT32.
  • Only 1 partition.
  • Do not use encrypted USB sticks.
  • Do not use USB sticks which simulate a CD ROM drive.
    • There may be no hidden files on the device.
  • For some types of device, the construction of the USB stick is significant. Maximum dimensions in mm: 70x20x10.
  • If in doubt, the USB stick should be formatted as "FAT32" without "extended attributes".

Download

Software download from the Loewe Internet site

You can download new software for your TV set from our homepage. To do this register on our homepage

http://support.loewe.tv (International),

http://support.loewe.tv/uk (United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland),

http://support.loewe.tv/au (Australia) or

http://support.loewe.tv/nz (New Zealand)

(under Register now).

Simply follow the steps in the registration process.

After the successful registration process and subsequent login to the homepage you have to register your set (have the article number and serial number ready – both are mentioned on the sticker on the rear side of the set or under Integrated features in the index of the TV set, see page 15).

Then you will get a list of downloadable contents for your TV set including the software for your TV set. Download the data and unpack all the files in this ZIP archive into the main directory of your USB stick.

Then carry out the software update as described below.

Software update

In the software update (package update) all the software releases in the TV are scanned and updated as required.

To do this, insert the USB stick with the downloaded software into a free USB port on the TV set (see connections page 11).

Calling Software update

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Calling Software update - 1

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Calling Software update - 2

SelectSettings,
▼ go to the menu line below.
Select Miscellaneous,
▼ go to the menu line below.

SelectSoftware update,

OK Call Software update Wizard.

The versions of the current software package are displayed.

SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD Current software package: V1.6.0.0 TV base software V10.5.0.40 DVB software V10.6.0.165 DVB bootloader V1.0.0.0 WIFI software V0.0.11.0 FRC software V10.4.21.0 MSP software V8.103.0.0 MPEG encoder software V8.22.102.0 Standby processor software V1.1.100.0 You can now search for new software. Please select the software type and start the search with the ● button.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - MENU: Call TV menu. - 2

OK Proceed

The TV set searches for a new software package on the USB stick.

If a new software version is available after the search, the following on-screen message appears (see page 127). If several different software packages are found on the USB stick, the latest software package is always used.

If no new software package was found in the search:

OK Exit wizard

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - OK Exit wizard - 1

Software update

New software package found

SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD Software package: current V1.6.0.0 new V2.1.0.0 If you want to load the new software now please press © . Otherwise you can stop it with 📄.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Software update - 2

OK Proceed.

OK Start loading software.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Software update - 3

END: Exit wizard.

Load new software package

SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD The software package is about to be loaded. TV base software V11.1.0 The loading process may take up to 50 minutes. Please do not switch off the TV set with the mains switch during this time.

A bar shows you the progress of the download. This process can take up to 50 min. Do not turn your set off during this time!

You will be informed at the end of the update.

After finishing loading:

Switch the TV off and back on at the mains switch.

Input of characters

USB keyboard

You can connect a USB keyboard to one of the USB ports of your TV set and use it in place of a remote control. With it, you can type internet addresses more comfortably into the browser and you can type characters more easily when changing the names of channels or inputting lists of favourites.

The keyboard can completely replace the remote control. An overview of the button assignment is on the right hand side of the table.

LOEWE. ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ TV REC DVD AUDIO POP-UP-M ZOOM 33 ③2 ③1 ③0 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wyz 0 AV ②9 ②8 ②7 ②6 ②5 �24 ②3 ②2 ②1 ②0 DISC-M MENU END INFO +V P+ ②1 ②0 ②1 ②2 ②3 ②4 ②5 ②6 ②7 ②8 ②9 ③0 ③1 ③2 ③3 ③4 ③5 ③6 ③7 ③8 ③9 ④0 ④1 ④2 ④3 ④4 ④5 ④6 ④7 ④8 ④9 ⑤0 ⑤1 ⑤2 ⑤3 ⑤4 ⑤5 ⑤6 ⑤7 ⑤8 ⑤9

Button combinations

Keyboard Remote control No.
Left and right switching buttonKeyboard layout between Standard (Latin) and Greek or Russian (only for the menu languages Greek and Russian)-
F1 Red button 13
F2 Green button 12
F3 Yellow button 21
F4 Blue button 20
F5 RECORD button 15
F6 PAUSE button 16
F7 STOP button 17
F8 PLAY button 19
F9 Button← 14
F10 Button→ 18
Alt + ESC END button 24
Ctrl + EndIn the browser: Stop input, leave input field-
EnterOK button11
0 ... 9Number buttons28, 29
Pg ↑ / ↓P+ / P- buttons23
Alt + + / -V+ / V- buttons10
Alt + FTV button3
Alt + RAUDIO button32
Alt + PPIP button26
Alt + TTEXT button8
Alt + OPlace the TV set into standby mode33
Alt + AMEDIA button27
Alt + IINFO button25
Alt + MMENU button9
Alt + EEPG button7
Alt + SSound off/on1
Alt + WTIMER button 5
Alt + DOne Touch Recording15
Alt + ZPicture format button6
Alt + HSound mode / Sound adjustment30
Arrow buttonDirectional keys ← ▶ ▶ ▶22

Input of characters

Character table

Key assignment for text input via the remote control

For certain functions the input of letters or characters is required. As with a cell phone press the numeric button (0-9) repeatedly until the desired character appears.

The characters available are language dependent.

Here the key assignment is for the menu language English.

Key Character (uppercase - lowercase)
11
2 ABC2 - abc2c 2
3 DEF3 - def33
4 GHI4 - ghi4i 4
5 JKL5 - jkl55
6 MNO6 - mno66
7 PQRS7 - pqrs77
8 TUV8 - tuv88
9 WXYZ9 - wxyz99
0 0 [space] ./\-+_,;:?!=& # %~@ $ * ' | ()

Tilting the TV set

Tilting the TV set

You can set the tilt angle of your TV set on the table stand to 0^ or 2.5^ .

Tools required: Torx screwdriver T 20

Allen key 5 mm

First, loosen the topmost of the three retaining screws of the table stand to get to the adjustment screw for the tilt angle (see illustration).

Then put the Allen key into the adjustment opening.

By screwing in the adjustment screw, you can adjust the tilt angle of the TV set (turned to the left as far as it will go: 2.5°, to the right as far as it will go: 0°).

When adjusting the tilt angle, position the TV set in the desired tilting direction.

Please only use the tilt angle 0^ or 2.5^ . Intermediate positions are not permitted and could damage the TV set.

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Tilting the TV set - 1

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical press or clamping device with three bolts and a central knob, no visible text or symbols.

The table stand is delivered set at an angle of 2.5^ .
To adjust the tilt angle (turned to the left as far as it will go: 2.5°, to the right as far as it will go: 0°), turn the screw with the Allen key approx. 1.5 times.
Do not overtighten the adjustment screw. This could damage the TV set!

Screw the retaining screw back in again. Tighten it with a torque of approx. 2 Nm (hand-tight).

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Remedy
All menus are displayed in the wrong language.The menu language was set incorrectly. Set themenu language:Press the MEDIA button in TV mode. In the MediaPortal, highlight the last menu item (Index) in the upper half and call up with OK. Mark the first key word and call it with OK. Then select the language and confirm it with OK.
In the TV menu, Connections cannot be called (displayed in grey).A timer recording is in progress. Wait until the timer recording ends or delete the timer recording (page 123).
The control functions of the Loewe Recorder and the Timer are not working or are not working properlya) The Digital Link function is not activated or not possible in the recorder.b) EURO-AV cable is not connected.a) Activate Digital Link in the recorder (see operating instructions of the recorder).b) Connect EURO-AV cable (page 111).
General problems when connecting external devices via an AV input.a) The AV standard is set incorrectly.b) The signal type is set incorrectly.a) Set the correct standard (page 108).b) Set the correct signal type (page 108).If AV standard or AV signal is set to “Automatic” then this can cause errors to be detected with signals that do not comply with standards. In this case standard and signal must be set according to the information in the operating manual of the external device.
The connection of a decoder does not function or does not function properly.a) The signal is not decoded because the correct decoder stations are not selected in the menu.b) The sound is missing in decoder mode because the wrong decoder sound is assigned in the menu.a) Select the right decoder stations in the menu (TV menu → Connections → Miscellaneous → Decoder stations → Select decoder station(s) (see page 109).b) Select the right sound code (always, never, automatic) in the menu (TV menu → Connections → Miscellaneous → Decoder stations → Sound encodig), see also decoder instructions.
Digital Link Plus does not work. a) EURO-AV cable is not fully wired (pin 10 not wired).b) Some recorders can only adopt stations during the initial installation of the TV set.a) Replace the EURO-AV cable.b) Restore the recorder to the as-delivered state (see recorder's operating manual).
With Teletext various characters are displayed incorrectly.The wrong character set has been set in the Teletext menu.Set the right character set: Select Teletext menu → Settings → Character set → Standard or the appropriate character set.
Errors occurred when running a CA module.Switch the TV set off. Remove the CA-module from the TV set. Wait a few seconds. Reinsert the CA-module. Switch the TV set on again.

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Remedy
No sound via the external digital audio amplifier.a) The external digital audio amplifier does not support the selected sound format (Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG).b) TV set and external digital audio amplifier are not connected with each other.a) Set PCM stereo on the DVD player in the sound selection. For DVB stations on the TV set switch to stereo in the Status display (INFO) – Language/sound (green button).b) Connect AUDIO DIGITAL OUT from the TV set to a digital input of the external digital audio amplifier and select the appropriate input to this.
A programmed recording was not made.Recording of analogue stations with VPS data: The programme to be recorded was not (no longer) in the programmes offered by the station via VPS.Recording of DVB stations with automatic time control:The provider deleted the programme from the EPG data, for example due to a programme change.The stations are exclusively responsible for the transmission of VPS data (for analogue stations) or for the use of the automatic time control (for DVB or MHEG-5 stations). The availability of the appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.
The picture format cannot be adjusted. A HbbTV application is loaded but is not active (not displayed).End the HbbTV application with the END button (see page 80).
When the Picture format button is pressed, the 3D mode selection appears instead of the Picture format selection.The TV set is displaying picture material in 3D.Whilst 3D material is being displayed, the picture format cannot be changed (see page 37).
The free capacity of the external hard disc is essentially indicated smaller than expected in the OSD.The hard disc has been formatted on FAT32 on a PC with Microsoft Windows (see also page 105).Format external hard disc on TV set again via TV menu → Settings → Miscellaneous → Format external hard disk.

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Remedy
If a desired IP address has been specified then no IP address will be automatically issued to your TV set.No DHCP server is working on your network. Set up a DHCP server.Assign the IP addresses for the TV set manually.
Despite video or music file being played back, no sound can be heard.a) The TV set is set to mute or the volume has been turned down too far.b) An audio device that does not exist or that is not connected is registered in the TV menu under Connections → Sound components (e.g. HiFi/AV amplifier).a) Increase the volume by pressing the V+ button on the remote control for longer. This will also cancel any mute setting.b) Connect up the audio device and switch it on.In the Sound components wizard change back to TV speakers.
Although the file is visible on the media server, it is not displayed in the MediaPortal.The file is not made available by your media server.Change to your media server. For this, read the section Media server software on page 137.
A media file that is displayed can not be played back.The format of the file is not supported (see also limitations in section File formats supported on page 137).No remedy.
Characters received in the WLAN code of the wireless router cannot be entered for the network configuration at the TV set.The device does not support all special characters.Change the WLAN key of the router.
When searching for wireless routers, no device is found.The router is not ready for wireless communication.Check your wireless router.Try to make the connection again a few minutes later.

If with wireless operation there should be any interference such as disruptions during playback or slow reactions by devices to commands, you could try the following:

  • Keep at least three metres distance from microwave ovens, bluetooth devices, mobile telephones and Wi-Fi compatible devices such as printers and PDAs.
  • Change the active channel on the WLAN router.

Technical data

General data

Type Connect 40 3D Connect 32 3DHD TV 1080pHD TV 1080p
Article number 51409xxx 51408xxx
Dimensions for device without stand (W x H x D) in cm100,2 x 63,9 x 6,681,4 x 53,4 x 6,1
Dimensions for device with stand (W x H x D) in cm100,2 x 66,6 x 26,081,4 x 56,0 x 26,0
Weight for device without stand (approx.) in kg22,417,3
Weight for device with stand (approx.) in kg24,719,6
Display technology Full-HD LCD mit Edge-LED backlight
Screen diagonal (in cm) / Picture format 101 / 16:9 80 / 16:9
Resolution (in pixels) / Motion Response 1920 x 1080 / 200 Hz1920 x 1080 / 100 Hz
Contrast (static / dynamic) 5.000 : 1 / 5.000.000 : 1
Viewing angle (horizontal / vertical) 178° / 178°
Power consumption On-Mode max. (W) (Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value) without / with DR+112 / 11674 / 81
Power consumption On-Mode Home (W) without / with DR+92 / 9659 / 65
Power consumption in Standby Mode (W)0,370,35
Power consumption when set is switched off (W)00
Ambient temperature (Celsius) 5° – 35°
Relative humidity (non-condensing) 20 – 80%
Air pressure 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m über NN)

Technical data

Electrical data

Chassis designation: SL 150 / SL 151
Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz
Tuner: terr./cable:satellite(1):VHF/hyperband/UHF4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0Single cable system: EN 50494
Range: terr./cable:satellite(1):45 MHz to 860 MHz950 MHz to 2150 MHz
Station storage locationsincl. AV and radio:5000
TV standards: analogue:digital:B/G, I, L, D/K, M, NDVB-T/T2(1), DVB-CDVB-S(1)/ S2(1)
Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC,NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)
Sound standards: analogue:mono, stereo, dual-channel
BG, DK, MN:FM-A2
BG, I, DK:FM-Nicam
L, L1:AM-Nicam
digital:mono, stereo, dual-channel, PCM
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Virtual Speaker
DTS
Dolby Digital AAC+
Audio output power(music/sine):2 x 40W / 2 x 20W
Teletext: TOP/FLOF Level 2.5
Page memory: 2000

Signals via PC IN / HDMI

The following table lists the compatible signals which your TV set can show via the PC IN connection and the HDMI connections (HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3).

Set the output signal on your PC, HDMI or DVI device so that it matches one of the signals in the table.

FormatHorizontalxVerticalImage frequencyConnection
480i60720x480i60HzPC IN, HDMI
576i50720x576i50HzPC IN, HDMI
480p60720x480p60HzPC IN, HDMI
576p50720x576p50HzPC IN, HDMI
1440x480p60HzHDMI
1440x576p50HzHDMI
720p501280x720p50HzPC IN, HDMI
720p601280x720p60HzPC IN, HDMI
1080i501920x1080i50HzPC IN, HDMI
1080i601920x1080i60HzPC IN, HDMI
1080p24 1920x1080p 24HzPC IN, HDMI
1080p25 1920x1080p 25HzPC IN, HDMI
1080p30 1920x1080p 30HzPC IN, HDMI
1080p50 1920x1080p 50HzHDMI
1080p60 1920x1080p 60HzHDMI
VGA640x48060HzPC IN, HDMI
SVGA800x60060HzPC IN, HDMI
XGA1024x76860HzPC IN, HDMI
WXGA1360x76860HzPC IN, HDMI
SXGA1280x102460HzPC IN, HDMI

Technical data

Connections (max. equipment)

Designation Type Function / Signal
220-240V~50/60 HzMains socket 220-240V ~ 50/60 Hz Supply voltage
HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3HDMI type A (3x) Digital Video/Audio IN: Digital video ^7 and audio
PC IND-SUB 15-pole Video IN: PC/STB video signal ^2
Video IN:Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)CVBS (VHS/8 mm)RGB
AVEURO-AVVideo OUT:CVBS (VHS/8 mm)Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)L/R
Audio IN:Audio OUT:L/R
LANRJ-45 Ethernet: Network interface
USBUSB type A (2x) USB 2.0: Multimedia files/software update
AUDIO INJack 3,5 mm Audio IN: L/R
OUT AUDIO DIGITALCinch (yellow)Digital Audio OUT (SPDIF):Digital audio
IN AUDIO DIGITALCinch (red)Digital Audio IN (SPDIF):Digital audio
CENTER INCinch (white) Audio IN: max. 2Vrms:Centre
SERVICEMini-DINService/L-Link
ANT TV 5 V=80 mAIEC socket75 Ohm / 5 V / 80 mA:Antenna/cable/DVB-T/C
ANT SAT 13/18V=350 mA max.ANT SAT2 13/18V=350 mA maxF socket (2x) ^1 75 Ohm 13/18 V / 450 mA:ANT-SAT DVB-S/S2
AUDIO LINKD-SUB 26-pole Audio OUT:Multi-sound
RS-232CRJ12 ^1 Data I/O:serial interface
CONTROLMini-DIN ^1 Rotating stand control (Positioning accuracy 1.5°)
IR LINKJack 3,5 mm ^1 Connection for IR station
CI-COMMON INTERFACECI slot (2x)Common Interface:Slot for CA module
Jack 3,5 mmHeadphones 32-2000 Ohm
AUDIO IN L AUDIO IN RCinch (white/red)Audio IN: L (white) / R (red)
VIDEO INCinch (yellow)Video IN:CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
AVSMini-DINVideo IN:Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

"Equipment and upgrade options, see page 140.
^2 For compatible picture signals, see table on page 135.

Technical data

MediaHome

File formats supported

Pictures: JPG, PNG, GIF

Audio: MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM)

Video: AVI (MPEG-1/2, DivX, XviD, AC3, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro), MP4 (DivX, XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MKV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AC3), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263, MP3, AAC LC), MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2 Audio, AC3), VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, AC3)

DivX up to a resolution of 720p
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC up to Profile High (Level 4.2)

Ethernet (wired network)

Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T), 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

WLAN (wireless network)

Standards supported:

IEEE 802.11b/q/n

Frequency range used:

2400-2483.5 MHz and 5180-5730 MHz

Types of encoding that are supported:

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Supported home network standard

Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)

Media server software

To play multimedia contents from devices in your home network, you require media server software which makes the relevant files available to you. Handling of individual files depends on the technical properties and also on the media server software used.

You can download a test version of the TwonkyMedia Mediaserver from our homepage. With your TV set, you have also acquired the option of obtaining a free licence for the currently available version of the Twonky media server. Alternatively, you can also use other media servers, e.g. the

Windows Media Player (WMP) from Version 11.

For communication with your PC, certain port addresses of the network connection are required. They may not be blocked by a firewall if there is one, otherwise this could cause serious connection errors.

Windows Media Player 11 requires the port addresses 1900 and the block of 10280 up to and including 10284 (all for UDP) as well as 2869 and 10243 (both for TCP). For TwonkyMedia the port addresses 1030, 1900 and 9080 (all for UDP) and 9000 (for TCP) must be available.

Other ports to be kept free depend on the operating system you are using.

Contact your network administrator about configuring the firewall.

Accessories

Accessories

The following accessories are obtainable from your Loewe dealer.

Installation options:

A large range of options for floor, table or wall installation are available for your TV set.

An overview of the available options can be found on page 141.

Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL:

With the Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL you can enjoy digital Surround Sound without expensive installation and connection of several speakers. The Sound Projector is easy to set and operate.

Loewe Individual Sound:

The TV sets can be perfectly enhanced with the Individual Sound speaker system. Numerous options for loudspeaker combinations can be realised with floor-standing loudspeakers, satellite loudspeakers and a subwoofer. Individual housing and trim colour designs are possible here too.

Loewe Individual Mediacenter:

With the Loewe Mediacenter you can play all radio sources, DVDs, CDs and audio data from the network, USB or NAS. You can connect an iPod or an iPhone via an integrated interface. The Mediacenter can be integrated into the home network via LAN, Powerline or WLAN. It forms the heart of the Loewe Multiroom systems.

Loewe DVD recorder:

The DVD recorders from Loewe are characterised by form and colour, which match Loewe TV sets, adapted user guidance and technology. Combined these devices form a system that offers many advantages.

Loewe Blu-ray player:

With the Loewe Blu-ray player BluTech Vision Interactive you are ideally equipped for the successor format to DVD. With the Loewe system integration you control BluTech Vision Interactive and your Loewe TV set simultaneously with the Assist remote control.

Loewe 3D Blu-ray player:

With the Loewe Blu-ray player BluTech Vision Interactive 3D you're fully kitted out to watch Blu-ray discs with 2D and 3D material. With the Loewe system integration you control BluTech Vision Interactive 3D and your Loewe TV set simultaneously using the Assist remote control.

Loewe 3D glasses:

The Loewe 3D shutter Active 3D Glasses give you clear 3D enjoyment and are compatible with all Loewe 3D flat TVs.

Loewe Audiovision:

Audiovision with integral 5.1 decoder creates impressive surround sound, even for televisions without a surround sound decoder.

As well as FM radio and CD/DVD player, Audiovision offers a connection for your iPod or your iPhone. Plus, thanks to video upscaling 1080p, you can also experience DVDs in full HD resolution.

Loewe Vesa adapter bolts:

You can purchase adapter bolts for wall holders in line with the VESA standard from your dealer or the Technical Customer Service (see service addresses on page 154). Four items are required.

Spacer bolts (1 item) Loewe order no. 70873.001.

Subject to availability.

Accessories

Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables

Module DVB-S2 Single (Art.No. 70622.080):

You can receive digital satellite and HDTV stations with the upgrade kit. The tuner is integrated in the TV set and is operated with the remote control/menu control.

The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 140.

Module DVB-S2 Twin (Art.No. 70286.080):

You can have two digital satellite tuners installed in sets with Digital Recorder. This enables reception of digital satellite and HDTV stations and extends the display of PIP and the recording possibilities of Digital Recorder for two digital satellite stations.

The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 140.

Module WLAN SL 150 (Art.No. 70830.082):

With the upgrade kit you add the WLAN function to the connection possibilities of your TV set with the home network.

The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 140.

The TV set can be connected to a home network system via the RS-232C (RJ12) interface.

The infrared function enables pieces of auxiliary equipment of other manufacturers to be operated, even if they are covered up. You operate the auxiliary equipment with its respective remote control via the Loewe TV set.

The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 140.

Module DVB-T2/C Single (Art.No. 70913.080):

With the DVB-T2/C Single conversion kit you add the Standard DVB-T2 to the reception possibilities of your TV set.

The Standard DVB-T2 is not available in all countries at the moment

The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 140.

Module DVB-T2/C Twin (Art.No 70914.080):

For sets with a Digital Recorder (DVB-T/C Twin) you add the Standard DVB-T2 to the reception possibilities of your TV set with the DVB-T2/C Twin conversion kit.

The Standard DVB-T2 is not available in all countries at the moment

The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 140.

Adapter and Cables:

AUDIO LINK adapter cable 0,25 m Loewe Art.No. 89954.001

AUDIO LINK cable 1,5 m Loewe Art.No. 89952.001

AUDIO LINK cable 6 m Loewe Art. No. 89952.002

AUDIO LINK cable 10 m Loewe Art.No. 89952.003

Cubic connector cable 6 m Loewe Art. No. 90418.930

USB extension (Art.No. 70167.080):

To ensure easy accessibility of the USB connection or enable USB sticks to be inserted with a large casing, the TV set can be connected to a USB extension.

This upgrade kit is available from your Technical Customer Service (see service addresses on page 154).

Accessories

Equipment variants

The equipment of the individual set variants and their upgrade/conversion possibilities is listed in the table below.

Set variants Connect 40 3D DR+Connect 40 3D Connect 32 3D DR+Connect 32 3D
DR+--
USB Recording --
DVB-T/C Single --
DVB-T/C Twin--
Digital audio decoder
HbbbTV
DVB-T2/C SingleArt.No. 70913.080-
DVB-T2/C TwinArt.No. 70914.080--
DVB-S2 SingleArt.No. 70622.080--
DVB-S2 TwinArt.No. 70286.080--
RJ12 / MU / IR-LinkArt.No. 70493.080
WLAN SL 150Art.No. 70830.082

ex factory
○ optionally available as an upgrade kit
□ optionally available as a conversion kit
- not available

TV set equipment

See the rating plate on the rear of the set for the precise product designation. The precise features are listed in the Integrated features item in the index of the TV set (see page 15).

Accessories

Setup possibilities Individual

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Setup possibilities Individual - 1

Connect 40 3D

• Table Stand (scope of delivery)
- Wall Mount WM62
- Wall Mount Flex 52 L ^(1)
• Floor Stand C40 (Equipment Board optionally available)
- Floor Stand 8 32-40 ^1
- Screen Lift Plus ^(1)
- Rack 110.30 ^1
- Rack 110.30 SW ^1
- Rack 165.30 ^1
- Rack 165.45 CS ^(1)
- Rack 165.45 SP ^(1)

Connect 32 3D

• Table Stand (scope of delivery)
- Wall Mount WM62
• Floor Stand C32 (Equipment Board optionally available)
- Floor Stand 8 32-40 ^1
- Screen Lift Plus ^(1)
- Rack 110.30 ^1
- Rack 110.30 SW ^1
- Rack 165.30 ^1
- Rack 165.45 CS ^(1)
- Rack 165.45 SP ^(1)

Environment

Environmental protection

Energy consumption

Your TV set is equipped with an eco-standby power supply. In the standby mode, the power consumption drops to low power (see Technical data on page 134). If you want to save even more energy then switch the device off with the mains switch. Please also note that the EPG data (Electronic Programme Guide) is lost under certain circumstances and possibly programmed timer recordings cannot be carried out via the TV set.

The power consumed by the TV set during operation depends on the energy efficiency preset in the initial installation (see page 22) or the setting in the TV menu (see page 34).

If you activate the automatic dimming (see page 34), your TV picture will adapt to the ambient brightness. This reduces the power consumption of the TV set.

Packaging and box

You have made a decision to purchase a high-quality technical product with a long service life. For disposal of the packaging, in accordance with national legislation we have paid a fee to a commissioned recycler to pick up the packaging from the dealer.

The set

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - The set - 1

The EU directive 2002/96/EC regulates the proper way to recycle, handle and utilise used electronic devices. Old electronic devices consequently must be disposed of separately. Please do not dispose of this device in normal household trash!

You may return your used set free of charge at designated recycling centres or at your specialist dealer whenever you purchase a new, comparable set. Additional details about return (also for non EU countries) are available from your local municipal authorities.

Batteries

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - Batteries - 1

The batteries supplied as initial equipment do not contain any pollutants such as cadmium, lead, or mercury. Used batteries should no longer be disposed of in the domestic waste according to the Battery Ordinance. Dispo se of your batteries at no charge in the collection containers which are set up for this purpose in retail stores.

Trademarks

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "Pro Logic" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

DOLBY.

DIGITAL PLUS

PRO LOGIC II

VIRTUAL SPEAKER

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - DOLBY. - 1

dts

Digital Surround

The screen font "LoeweL2700" is based on the "Tavmjong Bah Arev (tavmjong.free.fr)" font, which in turn is based on "Bitstream Vera". Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream Inc.

This set contains a software which is based partly on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

DivX and the corresponding DivX logos are registered trademarks of DivX, Inc.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).

This software is provided by the OpenSSL project "as is" and any expressed or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the OpenSSL project or its contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

This product contains software which was developed by third parties and / or software which is subject to GNU General Public License (GPL) and/or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). You can pass on and modify them in accordance with Version 2 of the GNU General Public License or optionally every later version which is published by the Free Software Foundation.

Loewe publishes this programme WITHOUT ANY GUARANTEE OR SUPPORT especially without an implicit guarantee of MARKET MATURITY or APPLICABILITY FOR A CERTAIN PURPOSE. Details can be found in the GNU General Public License. You can order the software from Loewe Customer Service.

You can download the GNU General Public License here: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.

The code number is an access code and thus the parental lock. Please keep in a safe place.

Glossary

0-9

24p movie display: Films released on Blu-ray Disc support presentation of 24p cinema films. The Blu-ray player transfers the original film format to the television with 24 frames per second. The DMM (DigitalMovieMode) set in the factory calculates and inserts additional intermediate pictures, which suppress film jerking typical for the cinema, thereby providing for a smooth motion sequence.

A

Active antenna: An antenna with its own power supply or amplification which can improve the reception is areas with a poor coverage.

Administrator: Person who administers the network, i.e. takes care of setting up and maintaining all components belonging to the network.

Automatic time control: Similar to VPS for analogue stations the automatic time control monitors the start and end times of programmes from DVB stations. If these times deviate from the data programmed in the timer data the running time of the recording is adapted automatically. The automatic time control is not supported by all DVB stations.

AVI: Abbreviation for Audio Video Interleave, a video container file format developed by Microsoft. A single AVI video file can contain several audio, video and text data streams (thus the name container format).

AV socket: Socket for audio and video signals.

AV sources: Audio/video source.

AVS: Audio/video sockets on the side of the TV set (cinch and mini-DIN).

B

Band: Name for a transmission range.

Blu-ray Disc: The follow-up format of DVD. The contents of about five DVDs fit onto one Blu-ray Disc (abbreviated BD). Therefore, the Blu-ray disc provides enough space for high-resolution images and multi-channel sound formats.

BMP: Abbreviation for Bitmap, a grid graphics format designed for Microsoft Windows and OS/2 that is wide spread and therefore supported by almost every popular graphics software package without any problems.

C

CA module: The Conditional Access module contains the coding system and compares the transmitted code with the one on the Smart Card. If they match, the appropriate stations or programmes are decoded.

CEC: Abbreviation for Consumer Electronics Control. CEC provides universal component control functions for entertainment electronics devices (e.g. System standby, One Touch Play). CEC is also known as Digital Link HD at Loewe.

Channel (WLAN): The channel is a certain part of the WLAN frequency band. Devices that want to communicate with each other have to use the same WLAN channel. In Europe the WLAN frequency band is currently divided into 13 channels.

Cinch cable: Cable for transmitting audio or video.

CI slot: See Common Interface.

Client: Also referred to as network client; describes an end device such as your TV set that is connected to the network and gets data from a (media) server to make it accessible to the user.

Common Interface: The Common Interface (CI slot) is a standardised interface. By inserting suitable decoding modules (CA modules) and a Smart Card coded digital programmes can be used.

Common Interface Plus: CI Plus is an advanced development of the Common Interface standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible to the previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as the programme provider permits this. Additionally, extended regulations apply however to CI Plus.

Component IN: Connection in which the video signal is transmitted via three separate cinch connections. It is made up of the brightness signal "Y" and the colour difference signals "Pb" and "Pr". YPbPr is the original analogue version of the digital YCbCr in which video data saved on the DVD as well as transmitted via satellite, cable or antenna in DVB are colour coded.

Conditional Access module: See CA module.

D

Decoder: Analogue, coded TV signals are passed through a decoder and made visible again.

DHCP: Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. DHCP allows automatic assignment of IP addresses with the aid of a DHCP server.

DHCP server: Network service which takes care of automatic assignment of IP addresses to clients.

Digital Link: System for controlling recorders (for video and DVD recorders from Loewe) via the Euro AV sockets of the Loewe TV set with concealed setup. Controlling the recorder for timer recordings.

Digital Link HD: System for controlling devices via the HDMI connection of the Loewe TV set in the case of concealed installation.

Digital Link Plus: System for controlling recorders according to protocol 50. For analogue stations the station and timer data are transmitted via the EURO-AV socket to the recorder. The timer recording is executed exclusively by the recorder. There is a different designation with different manufacturers.

DivX: Video Codec which allows even large files to be relatively highly compressed in their file size without having to tolerate important quality losses.

Glossary

DNS: Abbreviation of Domain Name System. Readable names (e.g. www.loewe-int.de) are assigned to numerical IP addresses. DNS servers are responsible for the resolution of readable addresses into the corresponding IP addresses.

Dolby Digital: Digital multi-channel audio. The digital standard for high quality home movie systems. The individual channels are broadcast separately in this standard. The three front channels right, left and centre, the two surround channels right and left and the external subwoofer channels are called a 5:1 signal.

Dolby Pro Logic: Analogue multi-channel audio. Converts a Dolby-coded stereo signal into a surround sound. This usually contains four channels (front left, centre, front right, surround channel). A special subwoofer channel is not generated in this method.

Dolby Pro Logic II: Analogue multi-channel audio. Dolby Pro Logic II is a further development of Dolby Pro Logic. This method generates a 6-channel spatial sound from a stereo or Pro-Logic signal (front left, centre, front right, surround left, surround right, subwoofer).

Dolby Surround: Analogue multi-channel audio system that brings four audio channels down to two audio tracks with the aid of a matrix coding.

Dolby Virtual Speaker: The Dolby Virtual Speaker technology simulates the surround playback of a real 5.1-channel playback with only two speakers.

DRM: Digital Rights Management. Processes to control copyright protected data. To be used correctly, DRM protected contents require not only a DRM capable device but also the possession of a license issued by the provider (to be paid for).

DTS: Digital Theater Systems; Digital multi-channel audio.

DVB-C/-S/-T: Digital Video Broadcasting stands for digital television. Technical DVB is the standardised process for transmitting digital content (television, radio, multi-channel audio, room sound, EPG, Teletext, and other supplemental services) through digital technology. C stands for transmission via cable, S for distribution via satellite and T for terrestrial or antenna distribution.

DVD: Abbreviation of Digital Video Disc and later Digital Versatile Disc.

DVD preceiver: Combi-device of DVD player and radio without integrated amplifier.

DVI: Digital Visual Interface, is an interface for transmitting digital video and graphic data (without audio).

Dynamic contrast ratio: Here the light intensity of the display is adapted in case of a high black portion in the picture. The so-called backlights are dimmed automatically and the contrast ratio increases temporarily, i.e. dynamically.

Electronic Programme Guide: See EPG.

EPG: Electronic Programme Guide is the electronic variant of a printed TV guide. Using the EPG you can watch the TV programme of the TV station, transfer the appropriate data. The list of programmes contains the title, beginning and end and duration of the programme. In addition brief descriptions of the content of the programmes is also displayed.

Ethernet: Cable linked data net technology for local networks (LANs). Also covers standards for e.g. plug connectors and transfer speeds.

Euro AV socket: Interface for connecting video devices to a TV set. This socket is also referred to as Scart socket.

F

FLOF: Full Level One Facilities. Teletext system in which names and numbers of the jump destinations are transmitted in the bottom line on every page. This guides the reader to related topics for example. An information about which pages exist and which pages have sub-pages is not available in FLOF.

G

Gateway: Transfer into another network; in this case connection from home network to internet.

The network device is usually used as the standard gateway which produces this connection. The DSL router generally also represents the internet gateway.

H

HbbTV: HbbTV (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) is an industry standard that offers an open platform for technology that is not dependent on manufacturers. HbbTV combines TV programmes with online services seamlessly over broadband internet (DSL).

HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. Coding system provided for the DVI and HDMI interfaces for secure transmission of audio and video data.

HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface is a newly developed interface for full digital transmission of audio and video data.

HDTV: High Definition Television is an umbrella term that covers a number of high resolution television standards.

HD-Ready: A quality seal that is awarded to products that are capable of displaying high-definition television (HDTV).

High band and Low band: Transmission ranges for satellites.

Host: Computer that the server services are provided from, i.e. that makes data available. Refer also to media server.

Glossary

ID3 tags: Additional information for MP3 and WMA audio files. Information about the singer, title, album and album cover can be saved here among other things. These data are edited on the PC by an ID3 tag editor.

IP address: IP addresses (Internet Protocol Addresses) are used to identify devices in an Internet Protocol (IP) network. IP addresses are made up of four groups of numbers of three digits each.

IR-Link: The IR-Link function allows the operation of accessory devices with concealed installation made by other manufacturers via the Loewe TV set. The infrared sensor required for this is available as an accessory and can be connected to the IR-Link connection of the TV set.

J

JPEG/JPG: Joint Photographic Experts Group is a committee which has developed a standard method for the compression of digital photos. This method JPEG (JPG for short), named after the committee, is a commonly used graphic format for photos.

1

LAN: Abbreviation for Local Area Network. Mainly used as a designation for networks with wiring (Ethernet).

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

LCN: Logical Channel Numbers. In stations with LCN, the channel location number belonging to the station is also transmitted by the provider. The stations are sorted according to these channel location numbers.

L-Link: Intelligent system connection between Loewe devices for the automatic exchange of information. Makes the operation of TV and Loewe system components even more convenient.

LNB/LNC: The crucial electronic component of a satellite antenna is referred to as an LNB (Low Noise Block Converter). It is mounted in the focal point of a parabolic antenna. The designation LNC (Low Noise Converter) indicates that conversion to lower intermediate frequency takes place. The supplemental block in the LNB refers to the fact that a whole frequency range (a block) is converted in each case.

M

MAC address: Hardware address of a network adapter, e.g. the network card in the PC. It is permanently assigned by the manufacturer and is used to uniquely identify devices in networks.

Mbit/sec: Information about the transfer rate in networks in megabits, i.e. millions of characters per second. With WLAN the maximum speed is 11 (IEEE 802.11b), 54 (IEEE 802.11g) or 300 (IEEE 802.11n) Mbit/sec, in wired networks 10 Mbit/sec or 100 Mbit/sec (Fast Ethernet).

Media server: Stands for the device which multimedia contents are stored on, but is also the name for the service provided by the device that makes this data available to the network.

MHEG-5: Digital teletext standard of the Multimedia and Hypermedia Expert Group. At the moment only available in United Kingdom and Ireland.

Modulator: Transmitter in the video or DVD recorder so that the devices can receive signals via the tuner of the TV device.

Mono: Single-channel audio.

MPEG: Digital compression process for video.

MP3: Data format for compressed audio files.

Multimedia contents: Videos, music files and photos are grouped together under this term.

N

NAS: Abbreviation for Network Attached Storage. The term describes a hard disc which is independently linked to the network (i.e. without a PC).

Network ID: NID refers to the so-called programme ID number, also known as network ID – a number between 0 and 8191. This specification is necessary in specific cable networks of some countries. Then only DVB signals of this station network are searched for.

NICAM: Audio standard. Is used in Denmark, England, France, Sweden, and Spain.

NTSC: American colour standard.

P

Page Catching: For teletext, refers to going to and calling a page number.

PAL: European standard.

PCM: Pulse Code Modulation for digital sound.

Picture in Picture: See PIP.

PIP: Picture in Picture; a function which displays two pictures on the screen.

Pixel: Denotes both the smallest unit of a digital graphic grid and its display on a screen with grid control.

Pixel error: A pixel error is a defective pixel, usually on an LCD. Pixel errors may be caused by production errors. They are expressed for example by a constantly lit pixel or a constantly black pixel. Single defective pixels however are excluded from a guarantee.

PNG: Abbreviation for Portable Network Graphics, a freely available grid graphics format for loss-free compression.

Port: A port is part of a network address (or also IP address). It allows assignment of data packages to various services which are running on one device under the same network address.

Powerline: Powerline refers to a type of wired network connection in which data can be transmitted via the domestic power supply using the optionally available adapters.

Glossary

Progressive JPEG: Progressive JPEGs are built up gradually. The quality of the picture increases progressively during the loading process.

ProScan/Progressive Scan: Progressive Scan (abbr. PS) or full picture method is a technique in the picture build-up of monitors, TV sets, beamers, and other display devices in which the output device is not sent line interlaced half pictures – unlike in the interlace technique – but real full pictures.

PSK: Stands in connection with WLAN encoding for Pre-Shared Key. Clients, who want to connect up to a wireless network secured with PSK have to know this key.

R

RGB: Colour signals red, green and blue.

Router: Device for connecting up several networks, e.g. home network and internet.

S

Satellite tuner: Receiver for satellite programmes.

SDTV: Standard Definition TeleVision.

SECAM: French colour standard.

Set-Top-Box: Set-Top-Box (STB for short) refers to a device in entertainment electronics which is connected to another device, usually a TV set, and offers the user additional functional options.

Signal input groups: Depending on the applied signal, the signal sources are divided into different groups. All signal input groups with their corresponding signal types and the possible inputs are listed below.

TV analogue:

Signal type: FBAS, YC, RGB-SD (480i/576i), Component-SD (480i/576i)

Input: Tuner analogue, AV, AVS

TV digital:

Signal type: DVB-SD, HDMI-SD (480i/576i)

Input: Tuner digital, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3

HD analogue:

Signal type: RGB-HD (video mode: e.g.1920x1080, 1280x720), Component-HD (video modes: e.g. 1920x1080, 1280x720) Input: PC IN

HD digital:

Signal type: DVB-HD, HDMI-HD

Input: Tuner digital, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3

Signal input groups (continuation):

PC:

Signal type: RGB (PC modes: e.g. 800x600, 1024x768, 1280x1024, 1360x768) Input: PC IN

PhotoViewer:

Input: USB

Signal strength: Strength of the received antenna signal.

Signal quality: Quality of the incoming antenna signal.

Smart Card: The Smart Card is an electronic chip card issued by the respective programme provider or by the certification-free Pay-TV operators. It contains the code which is decoded by the CA module.

Static contrast ratio: Describes the difference between the brightest and darkest picture display.

Stereo: Dual-channel audio.

Switch: Device for connecting several computers to a network.

Switch voltage: Video devices specify this voltage to switch the TV device to playback.

Symbol rate: Describes the transmission speed for data transmission.

T

Terrestrial: In data transmission a wireless transmission that does not use satellites as intermediate station is referred to as terrestrial.

TFT: Thin Film Transistor. One widely distributed application is control of liquid crystal flat screens, for which a signal transistor is used for each pixel. This design of display is also referred to as active matrix, however it is frequently also referred to as TFT display.

TOP: Table of Pages. Teletext system in which the individual pages are divided into topics. The blocks stand for a higher hierarchy level (e.g. News, Sport, Programmes) and the groups for the level below (e.g. Home/Abroad, Football/Tennis). Abbreviations can be assigned to the pages which are displayed in colour on the bottom line and can be selected with the four coloured buttons on the remote control. Information is also transmitted about which pages exist and which of them have sub-pages.

Tuner: Another term for receiver.

U

UPnP AV: Abbreviation for Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video. Is used to control network devices from all manufacturers. Has become a wide spread standard for home networking.

USB: Universal Serial Bus. Serial bus system for connecting external devices (USB card reader, USB stick).

Glossary

V

VGA: PC interface for connecting a monitor.

VPS: The Video Programming System (VPS) is a signal which some (but not all) analogue TV stations transmit in the blanking gap. The signal is used by video and DVD recorders when recording programmes to react to delays in start time, programme changes and excesses of the planned programme time.

W

WEP: Abbreviation for Wired Equivalent Privacy. Former standard process in the WLAN encryption, now outdated.

Wired network: see LAN.

Wireless network: see WLAN.

WLAN: Abbreviation for Wireless Local Area Network. Also referred to in brief as wireless network.

WMA: Abbreviation for Windows Media Audio, Microsoft's own audio data format. The contents are compressed as in MP3 files.

WMV: Abbreviation for Windows Media Video, Microsoft own video data format.

WPA: Abbreviation for Wi-Fi Protected Access. Replaced WEP as standard encryption for wireless networks.

Y

Ycc/Ypp: Colour standards for Set-Top-Boxes.

YCbCr: Digital colour model, see COMPONENT IN.

YPbPr: Analogue colour model, see COMPONENT IN.

EC Declaration of Conformity

BG

This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. It may be operated in all countries in the EU and also in Iceland, Norway and Switzerland. In France and Italy it may only be used indoors.

GR

EC Declaration of Conformity

EC Conformity Declaration

The designated product conforms to the provisions of the following European directives:

2006/95/EG

Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltages limits - LV-Directive.

2004/108/EG

Radio equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and the Mutual Recognition of their Conformity

2005/32/EG

Establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-using products and amending

Council Directive 92/42/EEC an Directives 96/57/EC and 2000/55/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council.

Affixing of the CE marking

LOEWE Connect 40 3D - 2005/32/EG - 1

The conformity of the designated product with the provisions of Directives is proved by full compliance with the following standards:

Richtlinie / Directive 2006/95/EG

X EN 60065 2002 + A1 2006, A11 2008

Richtlinie / Directive 2004/108/EG

XEN 550132001+ A1 2003, A2 2006XEN 550241998+ A1 2001, A2 2003
XEN 550202007XEN 61000-3-22006
XEN 550222006+ A1 2007XEN 61000-3-32008

Richtlinie / Directive 1999/5/EG

XEN 623112008XEN 301489-17V2.1.1
XEN 301489-1V1.8.1XEN 300328V1.7.1
XEN 301893V1.5.1

Adjusting the picture 34

Adjusting the sound 32

Alarm 57

Allow switching voltage 108

Antenna DVB 108

Archive playback 95

Assign digital audio input 109

Audio amplifiers....120

AUDIO button 21, 125

Audio commentary 23, 32, 33

Audio commentary volume ....32

Auto dimming - Room 34, 36

Auto dimming - Video (VBD+) 34

Auto format 34

Automatic speech detection 33

Automatic time control 106

AV audio signal 33

AV standard 108

B

Balance....33

Batteries 20

Blu-ray player 112

Bookmarks

Delete all 98,100

Delete individual 95

Jumping to 95

Setting 95

Brightness....34

Bundling the Cables 20

Button combinations 128

Button functions ......38

C

Call Digital Recorder menu 85

Camcorder....110

CA module 59

CA module selection 41

Change favourites lists 45

Add station 45

Delete station 45

Move station 45

Rename list 45

Change station 44

Delete station 44

Move station 44

Rename station 44

Restore station 44

Changing the title of a recording .....101

Character Table 129

Checking the hard disc 105

CI slot 59

Cleaning and care 9

Code number 56

Coloured buttons 38, 41, 50

Colour intensity 34

Colour temperature....34

Common Interface Plus 106, 107

Connecting antennas 18

Connecting the TV Set 18

Connections 11

Contrast....34

Control unit 10

Copy protection 124

Copy recordings

from an accessible TV set 104

to a connected recorder .....98

D

Data capture 49

Decoder....109

Decoder stations 109

Delete Manager 94

Set delete protection in the Timer data

menu 93

Setting/cancelling delete protection .....102

Delete programmed descrambling .....99

Deleting....97

All bookmarks 98, 100

Individual bookmarks....95

Parts of the recording 97

Recording....100

Deleting timer entries 94

Descramble scrambled recording .....99

Descrambling at DR continuous operation ..85

Device at connection AV 108

Digital audio input 121

Digital camera 110

Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) 113

Digital Link Plus 109, 124

Digital Noise Control 34

Digital teletext 52

Direct recording 89

One Touch Recording 89

Display....21

DR archive view 85

DR continuous operation ....85

DR+ Streaming 103

Copy from accessible TV set ....104

Extended standby mode 103

Follow me 104

Play via network 103

DR+ Streaming settings 86

DR device group name 86

DR device name 86

DR standby after switch-off ....86

IP port number 86

Share the DR archive with other TVs .....86

Using the DR archives of other TVs .....86

DVB character set ....41

DVB subtitles 38

DVD button 125

DVD player 112

DVD recorder 112

DVI/HDMI 112

E

Encrypted stations ...... 23, 24, 27, 42, 59

Energy efficiency 15, 22

Environmental protection 142

EPG 48

F

Factory settings picture/sound 35

Fast forward and rewind 88, 96

Favourites 31

Film quality impr. (DMM) 34

First installation wizard 22

FLOF 50

Formatting the hard disc 105

G

Game console 109, 112

Gaming mode 109

Index

H

HbbTV 80

HDMI....112

HDMI CEC 113

Headphone volume....32

Help 15

Hiding sections 97

HiFi/AV amplifier 115, 120

Highlight function 88

|

Index in the TV set 15

Info display 15

Inform about hidden sections....85

Installing the TV set 18

Interactive data services ....52

Internal WLAN antenna 60

iPIP 46

J

Jump distance 85

Jumping....87, 96

Jumping to bookmarks 95

Jump to automatically set bookmarks .....87

L

Language 22,57,131

Language/sound 41

Last station 38

LNC/LNB 25, 26, 27

Locking/unlocking a movie 101

Logical Channel Number 23

Loudness 32

M

Mains switch.... 10, 21

Manual station search 43

Maximum volume 33

Max. switch on volume 33

Media

Access....61

Overview....61

Quit 61

MediaHome....66

Media menu 62

MediaMusic....76

MediaNet 70

Favourites....70, 73

Internet....71

Personal area 72

Recommendations 70

Settings....74

Topic selection 70

MediaPhoto....77

Full-screen mode 77

Rotate picture 77

Slide show 77

MediaPortal 14

MediaText....80

MediaUpdate....60

MediaVideo 78

Jumping 79

Playback....78

Select language/sound 79

Wind....79

Memorise 48

Menu language 15

Menu operation 12

Mobile phone keypad 12

Move picture vertically 35

Muting 32

N

Numeric buttons 12, 15, 30

0

On/Off button 10

On-screen displays 58

OPC 34

Overview diagram 16

P

Page selection 50

Parental lock 56, 101

PC IN 114

Personal text pages 38, 51

Picture 34

Picture adjustment 34, 35

Picture format 34, 35

PALplus 35

Panorama....35

Zoom 35

Picture in Picture 46

PIN 56

PIP 46

Playing highlights 96

Programme info 38

R

Radio menu 17,53

Radio mode 21, 52, 54

REC button 125

Record conflict....94

Recording 122

Recording capacity 85

Recording quality 85

Recording subtitles 85

Recording wizard 92, 122

Remote control 3, 20, 125

Remote TV switch on via Digital Link .....109

Repeat initial installation 22

Replay function 88

Reset picture/sound 35

RS-232C interface 121

S

Safety 8,9

Scope of delivery 7

Search wizard 42

Selecting Audio/Video Source 31

Select memory medium 85

Select satellite installation 24

Select station 30

via favourites lists ....31

with P+/P- 30

with the numeric buttons ....30

with the station list 30

Serial interface 121

Serial recording tolerance 85

Service....154

Set Covers 18

Setting pre-record time and post record time .86

Set-Top-Box 112

Sharpness 34

Side by side 36

Signal type 108

Slow motion 88, 96

Smart Card....59

Smart Jump....85, 87, 96

Software download 126

Software update 126

Sound....32

Sound components wizard 115

Index

Sound mode 32

Sound off 32

Sound-picture synchronisation ....32

Sound system 116

Standard PIP 46

Standby mode 21

Station list 30

Station search/update 42

Status display 40, 90

Stop recording early 90

Subtitles....38, 41

Switching off 21

Switching off the TV set during recording ...90

Switching on 21

Switch on TV when marked 49

Switch to live picture 87

T

Teletext....50

Teletext functions 38

Teletext subtitles 38

Tilting the TV set 130

Time 39

Time and date 58

Timer data 93, 122

Automatic time control....122

Auto time control 93

Date....93, 122

Decoding overnight 93, 122

Descrambled recording 93, 122

Lock movie 93

Programme provider PIN 93, 122

Recorder 93, 122

Recording time 93, 122

Recording type 93, 122

Record subtitles 93, 122

Set delete protection 93

Station 93

VPS 93,122

Timer functions 57

Timer overview 91, 92, 94, 123

Timer recording....91

manually 92

via EPG 91

via teletext 92

Timer recordings ....122

TOP 50

Top/bottom....36

TOP table 50

TV button 20,125

TV menu 16

TV set equipment 140

TV viewing with time shift 87, 89

U

UPnP....60

USB keyboard 128

USB stick 126

V

Video podcast Video podcasts by country ....75 Video podcasts by genre ....75

Video podcasts ....75

Videotext subtitles ....51

Viewing a locked movie 102

Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording .....90

Viewing highlights from the archive .....100

Volume 32

Volume adjustment 33

VPS....106

VPS times 51

W

Watching other stations during archive recording 90

Wired connection 60

Wireless radio connection 60

Service

A Logwe Austria GmbH

Parkring 12

Audio Products Group Pty Ltd

67 O'Riordan St

Alexandria NSW 2015, Australia

Tel +61 - 2 9669 3477

Fax +61 - 2 9578 0140

E-mail: help@audioproducts.com.au

B NL L

Loewe Opta Benelux NV/SA

Uilenbaan 84

Customer Care Center

Industriestraße 11

Century Court, Riverside Way

Riverside Business Park, Irvine, Ayrshire

KA11 5DJ, UK

Tel +44 - 1294 315 000

Fax +44 - 1294 315 001

E-mail: enquiries@loewe-uk.com

IL Clear electronic entertainment Ltd

13 Noah Mozes St.

Agish Ravad Building

Tel Aviv 67442, Israel

Tel +972 - 3 - 6091100

Fax +972 - 3 - 6092200

E-mail: info@loewe.co.il

KSA Salem Agencies & Services Co.

Hamad Al Haqueel Street, Rawdah,

Jeddah 21413

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Tel +966 (2) 665 4616

Fax +966 (2) 660 7864

E-mail: hkurkjian@aol.com

LT A Cappella Ltd

Ausros Vartu 5, Pasazo skq.

01129 Vilnius, Lithuania

Tel +370 - 52 12 22 96

Fax +370 - 52 62 66 81

E-mail: info@loewe.it

LV Loewe, service center

Brivibas gatve 332,

Riga, Latvia, LV-1006

Tel +371 673 105 68

E-mail: dom332@dom332.lv

M Doneo Co. Li

34/36 Danny Cremona Street

Hamrun, HMR1514, Malta

Tel +356 - 21 - 22 53 81

Fax +356 - 21 - 23 07 35

E-mail: service@doneo.com.mt

MA Somara S.A.

  1. Rue Mustapha El Maani

20000 Casablanca, Morocco

Tel +212 - 22 22 03 08

Fax +212 - 22 26 00 06

E-mail: somara@somara.ma

N Pce, Premium Consumer

Electronics as

Ostre Kullerod 5

105005 Moscow, Russia

Tel +7 - 495 730 78 00

Fax +7 - 495 730 78 01

E-mail: service@loewe-cis.ru

S Kjaerulff 1 AB

Ridbanegatan 4, Box 9076

UAE Dubai Audio Center

P.O. Box 32836, Sheikh Zayed Road

Dubai, UAE

Tel +971 - 4 343 14 41

Fax +971 - 4 343 77 48

E-mail: service@dubiaudio.com

ZA The Soundlab (Pty) Ltd

P.O. Box 31952, Kyalami 1684

Gauteng, Republic of South Africa

Tel +27 - 1 14 66 47 00

Fax +27 - 1 14 66 42 85

E-mail: loewe@mad.co.za

LOEWE.

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : LOEWE

Model : Connect 40 3D

Category : Television